Yamaha RX A1070 Owner's Manual Web YJ290A0 EN1 Om UCRABGLF En A0

User Manual: Yamaha RX-A1070 Owner's Manual

Open the PDF directly: View PDF PDF.
Page Count: 172

DownloadYamaha  RX-A1070 Owner's Manual Web YJ290A0 EN1 Om UCRABGLF En A0
Open PDF In BrowserView PDF
AV Receiver

Owner’s Manual

• This unit is a product for enjoying video and music at home.
• This manual explains preparations and operations for everyday users of the unit.
• Read the supplied booklet “Quick Start Guide” before using the unit.

EN

CONTENTS
Introduction

5

3 Connecting the radio antennas....................................................38
FM/AM antennas (except Australia, U.K., Europe and Russia models) ......................................................38

Accessories................................................................................... 5

DAB/FM antenna (Australia, U.K., Europe and Russia models only) ..........................................................38

About this book ............................................................................ 5

4 Connecting a network cable or preparing the wireless antenna .....39

About remote control .................................................................... 6

Connecting the network cable.....................................................................................................................39
Preparing the wireless antenna ...................................................................................................................39

Batteries ......................................................................................................................................................... 6

5 Connecting other devices............................................................40

Operating range of the remote control......................................................................................................... 6

Connecting a device compatible with the trigger function ........................................................................40

FEATURES

6 Connecting the power cable ........................................................40

7

7 Selecting an on-screen menu language ........................................41

What you can do with the unit ........................................................ 7

8 Configuring the necessary speaker settings..................................42

AV CONTROLLER............................................................................................................................................. 9

9 Optimizing the speaker settings automatically (YPAO) ..................43

AV SETUP GUIDE (for tablet) .......................................................................................................................... 9

Measuring at one listening position (single measure) ................................................................................45

Application for smartphone / tablets “MusicCast CONTROLLER”............................................................... 9

Measuring at multiple listening positions (multi measure)........................................................................46

Part names and functions .............................................................10

Checking the measurement results .............................................................................................................47

Front panel ................................................................................................................................................... 10

Reloading the previous YPAO adjustments.................................................................................................48

Front display (indicators) ............................................................................................................................ 12

Error messages .............................................................................................................................................49

Rear panel..................................................................................................................................................... 13

Warning messages ........................................................................................................................................50

Remote control ............................................................................................................................................ 15

10 Connecting to a network device wirelessly .................................51
Selecting the connection method ...............................................................................................................51

PREPARATIONS

Connecting the unit to a wireless network..................................................................................................52

16

Connecting a mobile device to the unit directly (Wireless Direct) .............................................................57

11 Connecting to the MusicCast network ........................................59

General setup procedure ..............................................................16

MusicCast CONTROLLER ..............................................................................................................................59

1 Connecting speakers ..................................................................17

Adding the unit to the MusicCast network ..................................................................................................59

Basic speaker configuration ........................................................................................................................ 18
Advanced speaker configuration ................................................................................................................ 26

PLAYBACK

2 Connecting a TV and playback devices .........................................32

60

Input/output jacks and cables .................................................................................................................... 32
Connecting a TV ........................................................................................................................................... 33

Basic playback procedure .............................................................60

Connecting video devices (such as BD/DVD players) ................................................................................. 34

Selecting an HDMI output jack.....................................................................................................................60

Connecting audio devices (such as CD players) ......................................................................................... 36

Selecting the input source and favorite settings with one touch
(SCENE) ......................................................................................61

Connecting to the jacks on the front panel ................................................................................................ 37
En

2

Registering a scene ...................................................................................................................................... 62

Playback of Internet radio............................................................................................................................89

Selecting setting items to be included as scene assignments................................................................... 62

Registering favorite Internet radio stations (Favorites) .............................................................................91

Selecting the sound mode.............................................................63

Playing back iTunes/iPod music with AirPlay..................................92

Enjoying stereoscopic sound fields (CINEMA DSP HD3) ............................................................................. 64

Playback of iTunes/iPod music contents ....................................................................................................92

Enjoying unprocessed playback.................................................................................................................. 67

Playing back videos/audio in multiple rooms (multi-zone) ..............94

Enjoying pure high fidelity sound (Pure Direct).......................................................................................... 68

Multi-zone configuration examples .............................................................................................................94

Playing back digitally compressed formats (such as MP3, etc.) with enriched sound
(Compressed Music Enhancer) .................................................................................................................... 68

Preparing Zone2 ...........................................................................................................................................95

Listening to FM/AM radio
(except Australia, U.K., Europe and Russia models) ........................69

Registering favorite items (shortcut) ........................................... 100

Controlling Zone2 .........................................................................................................................................98

Registering an item.....................................................................................................................................100

Setting the frequency steps......................................................................................................................... 69

Recalling a registered item.........................................................................................................................100

Selecting a frequency for reception ............................................................................................................ 69

Controlling the unit from a web browser (web control) ................. 101

Registering favorite radio stations (presets) .............................................................................................. 70

Top menu screen ........................................................................................................................................102

Operating the radio on the TV ..................................................................................................................... 71

Control screen.............................................................................................................................................102

Listening to DAB radio
(Australia, U.K., Europe and Russia models only)............................72

Settings screen............................................................................................................................................103

Viewing the current status.......................................................... 104

Preparing the DAB tuning ............................................................................................................................ 72

Switching information on the front display ..............................................................................................104

Selecting a DAB radio station for reception................................................................................................ 72

Viewing the status information on the TV .................................................................................................105

Registering favorite DAB radio stations (presets)....................................................................................... 73

Configuring playback settings for different playback sources
(Option menu)........................................................................... 106

Displaying the DAB information .................................................................................................................. 74
Checking reception strength of each DAB channel label ........................................................................... 74

Option menu items.....................................................................................................................................106

Listening to FM radio
(Australia, U.K., Europe and Russia models only)............................76

CONFIGURATIONS

Selecting a frequency for reception ............................................................................................................ 76

111

Registering favorite FM radio stations (presets)......................................................................................... 76
Radio Data System tuning ........................................................................................................................... 78

Configuring input sources (Input menu)....................................... 111

Operating the radio on the TV ..................................................................................................................... 79

Input menu items .......................................................................................................................................111

Playing back music via Bluetooth ..................................................80

Configuring the SCENE function (Scene menu) ............................. 113

Playing back Bluetooth device music on the unit ...................................................................................... 80

Scene menu items ......................................................................................................................................113

Enjoying audio using Bluetooth speakers/headphones ............................................................................ 81

Configuring sound programs/surround decoders
(DSP Program menu) ................................................................. 116

Playing back music stored on a USB storage device.........................82
Connecting a USB storage device ............................................................................................................... 82

DSP Program menu items ..........................................................................................................................117

Playback of USB storage device contents .................................................................................................. 82

Configuring various functions (Setup menu) ................................ 119

Playing back music stored on media servers (PCs/NAS) ...................85

Setup menu items.......................................................................................................................................120

Media sharing setup..................................................................................................................................... 85

Speaker (Manual Setup) .............................................................................................................................123

Playback of PC music contents ................................................................................................................... 86

Sound ..........................................................................................................................................................127

Listening to Internet radio ............................................................89
En

Video............................................................................................................................................................129

3

Bluetooth ....................................................................................................................................................155

HDMI ........................................................................................................................................................... 130
Network ...................................................................................................................................................... 131

USB and network ........................................................................................................................................156

Bluetooth.................................................................................................................................................... 133

Error indications on the front display .......................................... 158

Multi Zone................................................................................................................................................... 134

Glossary .................................................................................... 159

Function...................................................................................................................................................... 137

Audio information (audio decoding format) .............................................................................................159

ECO ............................................................................................................................................................. 139

Audio Information (Others) ........................................................................................................................161

Language .................................................................................................................................................... 140

HDMI and video information ......................................................................................................................161

Viewing information about the unit (Information menu) ............... 140

Network information ..................................................................................................................................162

Types of information.................................................................................................................................. 141

Yamaha technologies .................................................................................................................................162

Configuring the system settings (ADVANCED SETUP menu)............ 142

Supported devices and file formats ............................................. 163

ADVANCED SETUP menu items ................................................................................................................. 143

Supported devices......................................................................................................................................163

Changing the speaker impedance setting (SPEAKER IMP.) ..................................................................... 143

File formats .................................................................................................................................................163

Turning on/off the remote control sensor (REMOTE SENSOR)................................................................ 143

Video signal flow........................................................................ 164

Selecting the remote control ID (REMOTE ID)........................................................................................... 144

Video conversion table ...............................................................................................................................164

Changing the FM/AM tuning frequency setting (TUNER FRQ STEP) ........................................................ 144

Multi-zone output .......................................................................................................................................165

Switching the video signal type (TV FORMAT) .......................................................................................... 144
Removing the limitation on HDMI video output (MONITOR CHECK)....................................................... 144

Information on HDMI.................................................................. 165

Selecting the HDMI 4K signal format (4K MODE) ...................................................................................... 145

HDMI Control...............................................................................................................................................165

Switching the DTS format notification setting (DTS MODE) .................................................................... 145

Audio Return Channel (ARC) ......................................................................................................................167

Backing up/recovering the settings (RECOV./BACKUP) ........................................................................... 145

HDMI signal compatibility ..........................................................................................................................167

Restoring the default settings (INITIALIZE)............................................................................................... 146

Trademarks............................................................................... 168

Updating the firmware (FIRM. UPDATE).................................................................................................... 146

Specifications............................................................................ 169

Checking the firmware version (VERSION) ............................................................................................... 146

Updating the unit’s firmware via the network .............................. 147
Updating the unit’s firmware immediately .............................................................................................. 147
Updating the unit’s firmware at power off ............................................................................................... 148

APPENDIX

149

Frequently asked questions ........................................................ 149
Troubleshooting ........................................................................ 150
First, check the following:.......................................................................................................................... 150
Power, system and remote control........................................................................................................... 150
Audio........................................................................................................................................................... 151
Video ........................................................................................................................................................... 153
FM/AM radio (AM radio feature is not available on the Australia, U.K., Europe and Russia models)..... 154
DAB radio (Australia, U.K., Europe and Russia models only) ................................................................... 154
En

4

Introduction
Accessories

About this book

Check that the following accessories are supplied with the product.

# AM antenna
(except Australia, U.K., Europe and
Russia models)

The illustrations of the main unit and remote control used in this manual are of the U.S.A.
model, unless otherwise specified.

# DAB/FM antenna

In this manual, illustrations of English menu screens are used as examples.

(Australia, U.K., Europe and Russia
models only)

(China, Korea, U.K., Europe and Russia models only)
For information on how to control external devices with the remote control, refer to
“Supplement for Remote Control” on the supplied CD-ROM.
Some features are not available in certain regions.
Due to product improvements, specifications and appearance are subject to change without
notice.

# FM antenna
(except Australia, U.K., Europe and
Russia models)

This manual explains operations using the supplied remote control.

# YPAO microphone

This manual describes all the “iPod touch”, “iPhone” and “iPad” as the “iPod”. “iPod” refers to
“iPod touch”, “iPhone” and “iPad”, unless otherwise specified.
Icons used in this manual

Y
indicates precautions for use of the unit and its feature limitations.

# Power cable

X

# Remote control

indicates supplementary explanations for better use.

# Batteries (AAA, R03, UM-4) (x2)
# CD-ROM (Owner’s Manual)
# Quick Start Guide
* (Except Australia, U.K., Europe and Russia models)
One of the above FM antennas is supplied depending on the region of purchase.
* The supplied power cable varies depending on the region of purchase.

En

5

About remote control
This section explains how to use the supplied remote control.

Batteries
Insert the batteries the right way round.

Operating range of the remote control
Point the remote control at the remote control sensor on the unit and remain within the
operating range shown below.

Within
6 m (20 ft)
30°

30°

En

6

FEATURES
What you can do with the unit
The unit is equipped with the various useful features.

More advanced ENTERTAINMENT
sound programs (p.65)

Various wireless connection
methods (p.51)

Connecting various devices (p.32)
By processing front left and front right sound fields

The unit supports the Wi-Fi feature that allows the unit to

A number of HDMI jacks and various input/output jacks on

individually, the ENTERTAINMENT sound programs are

connect to your wireless router (access point) without a

the unit allow you to connect video devices (such as BD/DVD

further improved in acoustic positioning and sound

network cable connection. In addition, Wireless Direct

players), audio devices (such as CD players), game consoles,

transition. These programs allow you to enjoy clearer vocal

enables connecting a mobile device to the unit directly

camcorders, and other devices.

and instrumental sounds, distinct narrations, and more

without router.

dynamic sound effects.

Playing back TV audio in surround
sound with a single HDMI cable
connection (Audio Return Channel:
ARC) (p.32)

Surround playback with 5 speakers
placed in front (p.66)
PL
Presence L
Sound field

PR
Presence R
Sound field

If you have surround speakers but there is no space to place
them in the rear of your room, you can place them in the
front and enjoy multichannel surround sound with the 5

When using an ARC-compatible TV, you only need one HDMI

speakers placed in the front (Virtual CINEMA FRONT).

cable to enable video output to the TV, audio input from the
TV, and the transmission of HDMI Control signals.

Home Audio Network with
MusicCast (p.59)

HDMI Control
TV audio

Video from external
device

SL
Surround L
Sound field

SR
Surround R
Sound field

The unit supports the MusicCast feature that allows you to
link a MusicCast compatible device to another device in a
different room and play them back simultaneously, or
control all MusicCast compatible devices with the dedicated
application “MusicCast CONTROLLER”.

Image of sound field processing

Low power consumption (p.140)
The ECO mode (power saving function) reduces the unit’s
power consumption.

En

7

CINEMA DSP
The excitement of a concert hall and the powerful sense of being inside a movie - we all want to enjoy these experiences in our own living room. Yamaha has pursued the fulfillment of these desires
for more than 30 years, and this fulfillment has now taken shape as the Yamaha AV receivers.

What is a sound field?

CINEMA DSP

We perceive sound from a voice or an instrument not only as the sounds that are heard directly

Yamaha has accumulated a massive amount of acoustical data by analyzing the actual sound

but also as the “reflected” or “reverberant” sound that has been reflected by the walls or

fields of concert halls and performance spaces around the world. “CINEMA DSP” allows this

ceiling of the building. The character of the reflected and reverberant sound is affected by the

data to be applied to create sound fields. This unit contains a wide variety of sound programs

shape, size, and material of the building, and all of these sounds taken together are what give

using CINEMA DSP.

us the auditory sensation of being in that specific place.

By selecting a sound program that is appropriate to the content of the playback source such as

This unique acoustical character of a specific space is what we call the “sound field”.

movies, music, or games, you can maximize the acoustical effectiveness of that specific
content. (For example, a sound program designed for movies can give you the sensation of

Conceptual diagram of a concert hall’s sound field

actually being in that scene.)

CINEMA DSP HD3
“CINEMA DSP HD3” is Yamaha’s flagship 3D sound field playback technology that takes full
advantage of the massive amount of acoustic reflection data included in the sound field data.
It delivers more than twice as much capability for generating acoustic reflections as
conventional CINEMA DSP 3D, in addition to high-frequency playback capability, delivering an
utterly natural and powerful spatial sound field.

Conceptual diagram of a sound field created by the unit

Capability for reproducing reflections

Level

(when the sound program “Hall in Munich” is selected)
CINEMA DSP HD3

CINEMA DSP 3D

Time

En

8

Useful applications
The following applications provide you the flexibility to control the unit or assist you with the cable connections.

AV CONTROLLER

AV SETUP GUIDE (for tablet)

MusicCast CONTROLLER

“AV CONTROLLER” will turn your smartphone/tablet into a

“AV SETUP GUIDE” is an application that assists you with

MusicCast CONTROLLER is an application that allows you to

Wi-Fi enabled remote control for your Yamaha network

cable connections between AV receiver and source devices

link a MusicCast compatible device to other MusicCast

products. This application provides you the flexibility to

as well as AV receiver setup. This application guides you

compatible devices in other rooms and play them back

control the available inputs, volume, mute, power

through the various settings such as speaker connections,

simultaneously. This app lets you use your smartphone or

commands and playback source.

TV and video/audio device connections and selecting the

other mobile device instead of the remote control to easily

speaker system.

select music to play back as well as configure the unit and

Functions

MusicCast compatible devices.

• Power on/off and volume adjustment

Functions

• Input, scene and sound mode selection

• Connection guide (speakers, TV and video/audio devices)

Functions

• DSP Parameter adjustment

• Setup guide (YPAO settings and various setup assistance

• Selecting and playing back various content

• Playback control (including music selection for some

with illustrations)

– Play back music from your mobile device

• Viewing owner’s manual

– Select an Internet radio station

X

X

– Play back music files stored on media servers (PCs/NAS)

For details, search for “AV CONTROLLER” on the App Store or Google

For details, search for “AV SETUP GUIDE” on the App Store or Google

– Play back music files stored on a USB storage device

Play.

Play.

sources)

• Operating and configuring the unit
– Select the input source, adjust the volume and mute the
audio output
– Select from a wide variety of sound processing features

X
For details, search for “MusicCast CONTROLLER” on the App Store or
Google Play.

En

9

Part names and functions
This section explains the functions of the parts of the unit.

Front panel
a

b

c

d

e

MAIN ZONE
PURE DIRECT

INPUT

f
a MAIN ZONE z key
Turns on/off (standby) the unit.

b Standby indicator
Lights up when the unit is in standby mode under any of the
following conditions.
• HDMI Control is enabled (p.130)

VOLUME

g

h

f INPUT knob

Opening the front panel door

Selects an input source.

To use controls or jacks behind the front panel door, gently

g Front panel door

press the bottom of the door to open it. Keep the door closed

For protecting controls and jacks (p.11).

h VOLUME knob

when not using controls or jacks behind the front panel door.
(Be careful not to trap your fingers.)

Adjusts the volume.

• Standby Through is enabled (p.131)
• Network Standby is enabled (p.132)
• Bluetooth Standby is enabled (p.133)

c Front display
Displays information (p.12).

d Remote control sensor
Receives remote control signals (p.6).

e PURE DIRECT key
Enables/disables Pure Direct (p.68).

En

10

■ Inside of the front panel door
a

b

cd e

ON SCREEN

OPTION

fg

h

ij

SCENE

TONE CONTROL STRAIGHT
1

2

3

kl

m

INFO(WPS)

MEMORY

PRESET

FM

AM

TUNING

n

4

(CONNECT)

MULTI ZONE

PROGRAM
ENTER
ZONE 2
RETURN

ZONE CONTROL

DISPLAY

VIDEO AUX

PHONES
USB

5V

o

a ON SCREEN key
Displays the on-screen menu on the TV.

b Menu operations keys
Cursor keys: Select a menu or a parameter.
ENTER: Confirms a selected item.
RETURN: Returns to the previous screen.

c OPTION key
Displays the option menu (p.106).

d DISPLAY key
Displays status information on the TV (p.105).

e TONE CONTROL key
Adjusts the high-frequency range and low-frequency range of
output sounds (p.107).

f STRAIGHT (CONNECT) key
Enables/disables the straight decode mode (p.67).
Enters MusicCast CONTROLLER registration by holding down for 5
seconds (p.59).

1A

YPAO MIC

SILENT CINEMA

p

q

L

AUDIO

R

HDMI IN

r

h SCENE keys
Select the assigned input source (including the selected radio
station or content when it is assigned), sound program, and
various settings with one touch. Also, turns on the unit when it is
in standby mode (p.61).

i MULTI ZONE keys

(U.S.A. model)

l FM and AM keys (except Australia, U.K., Europe and
Russia models)
Switch between FM and AM (p.69).

FM and DAB keys (Australia, U.K., Europe and Russia
models only)
Switch between FM and DAB (p.72, p.69).

ZONE 2: Enables/disables the audio output to Zone2 (p.98).
ZONE CONTROL: Changes the zone (main zone or Zone2) that is
controlled by the keys and knobs on the front panel (p.98).

j INFO (WPS) key
Selects the information displayed on the front display (p.104).
Enters the wireless network connection setup (WPS push button
configuration) by holding down for 3 seconds (p.53).

k MEMORY key
Registers FM/AM/DAB radio stations as preset stations (p.70, p.73,
p.76).
Registers USB/network contents or Bluetooth input source as
shortcuts (p.100).

g PROGRAM keys

m PRESET keys
Select a preset FM/DAB radio station (p.73, p.77) (Australia, U.K.,
Europe and Russia models) or a preset FM/AM radio station (p.70)
(other models).
Selects a USB/network content from shortcuts (p.100).

n TUNING keys
Select the radio frequency (p.69).

o USB jack
For connecting a USB storage device (p.82).

p YPAO MIC jack
For connecting the supplied YPAO microphone (p.43).

q PHONES jack

Select a sound program or a surround decoder (p.63).

For connecting headphones.

r VIDEO AUX jacks
For connecting a device, such as a camcorder and a game console
(p.37).
En

11

Front display (indicators)
a bc

de

h

g

f

j

i

k

ECO

VOL. MUTE A-DRC
VIRTUAL YPAO VOL.

ZONE
PARTY
2
IN OUT 1 2
LINK MASTER STEREO TUNED
Hi-Res ENHANCER SLEEP
HD 3

lmn

o

p

q r

a HDMI
Lights up when HDMI signals are being input or output.

IN
Lights up when HDMI signals are being input.

OUT1/OUT2
Indicates the HDMI OUT jacks currently outputting an HDMI signal.

b ECO
Lights up when the unit is in the eco mode (p.140).

c Firmware update indicator
Lights up when a firmware update is available via the network
(p.147)

d LINK MASTER
Lights up when the unit is the master device of the MusicCast
network.

e ZONE2
Lights up when Zone2 is enabled (p.98).

f STEREO
Lights up when the unit is receiving a stereo FM radio signal.

TUNED
Lights up when the unit is receiving an FM radio station signal
(Australia, U.K., Europe and Russia models) or an FM/AM radio
station signal (other models).

g PARTY
Lights up when the unit is in the party mode (p.99).

FPL L C R FPR
SL
SW
SR
SBL SB SBR

rs
h Information display

t

u

s VIRTUAL

Displays the current status (such as input name and sound mode
name). You can switch the information by pressing INFO (p.104).

i Volume indicator
Indicates the current volume.

Lights up when the Virtual Presence Speaker (VPS) or Virtual
Surround Back Speaker (VSBS) (p.64), or the virtual surround
processing (p.66) is working.

t Speaker indicators
Indicate speaker terminals from which signals are output.

j MUTE
Blinks when audio is temporarily muted.

A Front speaker (L)
S Front speaker (R)

k A-DRC
Lights up when Adaptive DRC (p.107) is working.

l Signal strength indicator
Indicates the strength of the wireless network signal (p.51).

m Bluetooth indicator

D Center speaker
F Surround speaker (L)
G Surround speaker (R)
H Surround back speaker (L)
J Surround back speaker (R)

Lights up when the unit is connecting to a Bluetooth device (p.80).

n Hi-Res

K Surround back speaker
B Front presence speaker (L)

Lights up when the high-resolution mode (p.109) is working.

“CINEMA DSP HD” lights up when CINEMA DSP (p.64) is working.
“CINEMA DSP !” lights up when CINEMA DSP HD3 is activated.

p ENHANCER
Lights up when Compressed Music Enhancer (p.68) is working.

q SLEEP
Lights up when the sleep timer is on.

r Cursor indicators
Indicate the remote control cursor keys currently operational.

En

N Front presence speaker (R)
L Subwoofer

o CINEMA DSP indicator

12

u YPAO VOL.
Lights up when YPAO Volume is enabled (p.107).

Rear panel
a

b

c

d

e

f

(HDCP2.2)

1
ARC

(ZONE OUT)

h

HDMI (HDCP2.2)

HDMI OUT
2

g

AV 1

AV 2

AV 3

i

NETWORK

AV 4

AV 5

AV 6

j k

l

m

( 3 NET )

AV 7

(1 BD/DVD)

AC IN

AV 1

AV 2

(1 BD/DVD)

AV 3

AV 4

TRIGGER
OUT

COMPONENT VIDEO

Y

AV 1

PR

PB

A

1

REMOTE

12V 0.1A
MAX. TOTAL

VIDEO

IN

RS-232C

OUT

2
B

PHONO
L

AUDIO 1

AUDIO 2

Y

AUDIO 3

(2 TV)

PR

PB

AV 2

PRE OUT

ZONE OUT

L

(SINGLE)

1

R

R

GND

1 OPTICAL

2 OPTICAL

3 COAXIAL

2

4 COAXIAL

5 COAXIAL

6 OPTICAL

ZONE 2

FRONT

SURROUND

SUR. BACK

SUBWOOFER

CENTER

SPEAKERS
R

SURROUND

L

R

EXTRA SP2
SURROUND BACK

L

R

EXTRA SP1
F.PRESENCE

L

R

CENTER

FRONT

L

ANTENNA
(4 RADIO)

75ȍ

FM

AM

SINGLE

ZONE 2

n

ZONE 2/BI-AMP

o

p

(U.S.A. model)
* The area around the video/audio output jacks is marked in white on the actual product to prevent improper
connections.

En

13

q

a PHONO jacks

q PRE OUT jacks

For connecting to a turntable (p.36).

For connecting to a subwoofer with built-in amplifier (p.23) or to an external power amplifier (p.31).

b AUDIO 1-3 jacks
For connecting to audio playback devices and inputting audio signals (p.36).

c AV 1-4 jacks
For connecting to video/audio playback devices and inputting video/audio signals (p.34).

d HDMI OUT 1 jack
For connecting to an HDMI-compatible TV and outputting video/audio signals (p.32). When using ARC, TV
audio signal can also be input through the HDMI OUT 1 jack.

HDMI OUT 2 (ZONE OUT) jack
For connecting to an HDMI-compatible TV and outputting video/audio signals (p.33), or for connecting to
an HDMI-compatible device used in Zone2 (p.96).

e COMPONENT VIDEO (AV 1-2) jacks
For connecting to video playback devices that support component video and inputting video signals
(p.34).

f HDMI (AV 1-7) jacks
For connecting to HDMI-compatible playback devices and inputting video/audio signals (p.34).

g TRIGGER OUT 1-2 jacks
For connecting to devices that support the trigger function (p.40).

h REMOTE IN/OUT jacks
For connecting to an infrared signal receiver/emitter that allows you to operate the unit and other
devices from another room (p.96).

i NETWORK jack
For connecting to a network with a network cable (p.39).

j Wireless antenna
For a wireless (Wi-Fi) connection to a network (p.51) and a Bluetooth connection (p.80).

k RS-232C terminal
This is a control expansion terminal for custom installation. Consult your dealer for details.

l VOLTAGE SELECTOR
(Brazil and General models only)
Selects the switch position according to your local voltage (p.40).

m AC IN jack
For connecting the supplied power cable (p.40).

n ANTENNA jacks
For connecting to radio antennas (p.38).

o ZONE OUT jacks
For connecting to the external amplifier used in Zone2 and for outputting audio (p.95).

p SPEAKERS terminals
For connecting to speakers (p.17).

En

14

Remote control
a Remote control signal transmitter

a

Transmits infrared signals.

b z (receiver power) key

b

Turns on/off (standby) the unit.

AV

c

d

1

2

3

4

5

6

7

V-AUX

c Input selection keys

AUDIO

1

2

3

PHONO

TUNER

BLUETOOTH

USB

NET

PARTY

HDMI OUT

MAIN

ZONE 2

o
p

SCENE

e

1

2

f

PROGRAM

g

TOP MENU

h

3

MUTE

4

VOLUME

r
POP-UP/MENU

ON
SCREEN

OPTION

i

DISPLAY

MODE

TUNING

PRESET

SUR. DECODE STRAIGHT
MOVIE

MUSIC
ENHANCER PURE DIRECT

INFO

SLEEP

1

2

d MAIN/ZONE2 switch
Changes the zone (main zone or Zone2) that is controlled by the
remote control (p.98).

3

4

5

6

7

8

9

0

MEMORY

ENT

t

Operate the FM/AM/DAB radio when “TUNER” is selected as the
input source (p.69).
BAND: Switches between FM and DAB radio (Australia, U.K.,
Europe and Russia models), or FM and AM radio (other models).
PRESET: Select a preset station.
TUNING: Select the radio frequency.

External device operation keys
Let you perform playback operations when “USB” or “NET” is
selected as the input source, or control playback of the HDMI
Control-compatible playback device (p.165).

k Sound mode keys
Select a sound mode (p.63).

l INFO key
Selects the information displayed on the front display (p.104).

m SLEEP key
Pressing this key repeatedly will specify the time (120 min, 90 min,
60 min, 30 min, off), in which the unit switches to the standby mode.

n Numeric keys
Let you enter numerical values, such as radio frequencies.

e SCENE keys
Select the registered input source, sound program, and various
settings with one touch. Also, turns on the unit when it is in
standby mode (p.61).

BAND

k
l
m
n

s

ENTER

RETURN

j

q

Select an input source for playback.
AV 1-7: AV 1-7 jacks
V-AUX: VIDEO AUX jacks (on the front panel)
AUDIO 1-3: AUDIO 1-3 jacks
PHONO: PHONO jacks
TUNER: FM/AM/DAB radio
BLUETOOTH: Bluetooth connection
(the unit as a Bluetooth receiver)
USB: USB jack (on the front panel)
NET: NETWORK sources
(press repeatedly to select a desired network source)

j Radio keys

f PROGRAM keys
Select a sound program, a surround decoder, an input source, a
network source, a registered item (shortcut), a browse screen
page, the volume of dialogue sounds or shuffle/repeat settings
(p.137).

g External device operation keys
Displays menus for the HDMI Control-compatible playback device
(p.165).

h ON SCREEN key

MEMORY key
Registers FM/AM/DAB radio stations as presets (p.70, p.73, p.76).
Registers USB/network contents or Bluetooth input source as
shortcuts (p.100).

o HDMI OUT key
Selects HDMI OUT jacks to be used for video/audio output (p.60).

p PARTY key
Turns on/off the party mode (p.99).

q VOLUME keys
Adjust the volume.

r MUTE key
Mutes the audio output.

Displays the on-screen menu on the TV.

i Menu operation keys

s OPTION key
Displays the option menu (p.106).

Cursor keys: Select a menu or the parameter.
ENTER: Confirms a selected item.
RETURN: Returns to the previous screen.

t DISPLAY key
Displays status information on the TV (p.105).

X
(China, Korea, U.K., Europe and Russia models only)

(U.S.A. model)

For information on the keys other than those above, refer to
“Supplement for Remote Control” on the supplied CD-ROM.

En

15

PREPARATIONS
General setup procedure
1 Connecting speakers . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . (p.17)
2 Connecting a TV and playback devices. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . (p.32)
3 Connecting the radio antennas . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . (p.38)
4 Connecting a network cable or preparing the wireless antenna . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . (p.39)
5 Connecting other devices . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . (p.40)
6 Connecting the power cable . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . (p.40)
7 Selecting an on-screen menu language . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . (p.41)
8 Configuring the necessary speaker settings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . (p.42)
9 Optimizing the speaker settings automatically (YPAO). . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . (p.43)
10 Connecting to a network device wirelessly. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . (p.51)
11 Connecting to the MusicCast network . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . (p.59)
This completes all the preparations. Enjoy playing movies, music, radio and other content with the unit!

En

16

1 Connecting speakers
The unit has 7 built-in amplifiers. You can connect 2 to 9 speakers and up to 2 subwoofers to create the favorite acoustic space in your room.
You can also apply bi-amp connections, channel expansion (using an external power amplifier) or multi-zone configurations to enhance your system (p.26).
Caution
Under its default settings, the unit is configured for 8-ohm speakers. When connecting 6-ohm speakers, set the unit’s speaker impedance to “6 Ω MIN”. In this case, you can also use 4-ohm speakers as the front speakers.
For details, see “Setting the speaker impedance” (p.23).

Ideal speaker layout

Functions of each speaker

E

0.5 to 1 m
(1.6 to 3.3 ft)

1.8 m
(5.9 ft)

0.5 to 1 m
(1.6 to 3.3 ft)

1

9

1.8 m
(5.9 ft)

2

3

Speaker type

R

Function

Front (L/R)
12

Produce front left/right channel sounds (stereo sounds).

Center 3

Produces center channel sounds (such as movie dialogues and vocals).

Surround (L/R)
45

Produce surround left/right channel sounds. Surround speakers also produce
surround back channel sounds when no surround back speakers are connected.

Surround back (L/R)
67

Produce surround back left/right channel sounds.

Front presence (L/R)
ER

Produce CINEMA DSP effect sounds or heights channel sounds of Dolby Atmos
and DTS:X contents.

9
Subwoofer 9

Produces LFE (low-frequency effect) channel sounds and reinforces bass parts of
other channels.
This channel is counted as “0.1”. You can connect 2 subwoofers to the unit and
place them on the left/right (or front/rear) sides of the room.

X
• We recommend using front presence speakers to have a full effect of the 3-dimensional sound fields. However,
the unit creates Virtual Presence Speaker (VPS) using the front, center and surround speakers to produce

4

3-dimensional sound fields even when no front presence speakers are connected (p.64).

5

• Use “Ideal speaker layout” (diagram on the right) as reference. You do not need to exactly adjust the speaker

10°~30°

10°~30°

layout to this diagram since the YPAO function of the unit will automatically optimize the speaker settings (such
as distances) to suit the speaker layout.

6

7

• When using only one surround back speaker, place it straight behind the listening position (middle of “SBL”
and “SBR” in the diagram).

0.3 m (1 ft) or more

En

17

Basic speaker configuration
If you do not apply bi-amp connections, channel expansion (using an external amplifier) or multi-zone configurations, follow the procedure below to place the speakers in your room and connect
them to the unit.

■ Placing speakers in your room

7.1/5.1.2 system [S]

Depending on the number of speakers, place the speakers and subwoofer in your room. This

(using both surround back and front presence speakers)

section describes the representative speaker layout examples.

This speaker system brings out the full performance of the unit and allows you to enjoy a

X

highly-natural 3-dimensional sound field with any contents.

• To have a full effect of Dolby Atmos contents, we recommend using a speaker system with a S mark. However,
you can also play back Dolby Atmos contents with the 7.1 system (using surround back speakers).
• To have a full effect of DTS:X contents, we recommend using a speaker system with a S mark.
• (About the number of channels) For example, “5.1.2” denotes “standard 5.1-channel plus 2 for overhead
speaker channels”. For details on how to place overhead speakers (presence speakers), see “Presence speaker
layout” (p.22).

X
• The surround back speakers and front presence speakers do not produce sounds simultaneously. The unit
automatically changes the speakers to be used, depending on the input signal and CINEMA DSP (p.64).
• When using front presence speakers installed to the ceiling or when using the Dolby Enabled speakers as the
presence speakers, configure the “Layout (Front Presence)” setting in the “Setup” menu before performing
YPAO (p.42).

En

18

5.1.2 system [S] (using front presence speakers)

7.1 system (using surround back speakers)

This speaker system uses the front presence speakers to produce a natural 3-dimensional

This speaker system creates Virtual Presence Speaker (VPS) using the front, center and

sound field, and also creates Virtual Surround Back Speaker (VSBS) using the surround

surround speakers to produce a 3-dimensional sound field, and also allows you to enjoy

speakers to add a sense of depth to the rear sound field. This system is suited for enjoying not

extended surround sounds using the surround back speakers.

only 5.1-channel but also for 7.1-channel contents.

X
When using front presence speakers installed to the ceiling or when using the Dolby Enabled speakers as the
presence speakers, configure the “Layout (Front Presence)” setting in the “Setup” menu before performing YPAO
(p.42).

En

19

5.1 system

5.1 system (front 5.1-channel) (using surround speakers)
We recommend using this speaker system when you cannot place speakers in the rear side of
the room.

1

2

4

9

5

3

X
You can enjoy surround sound even without the center speaker (4.1 system).

X
When placing surround speakers in the front side, set “Layout (Surround)” in the “Setup” menu to “Front” before
performing YPAO (p.42).

En

20

5.1 system (front 5.1-channel) (using front presence speakers)

2.1 system

We recommend using this speaker system when you cannot place speakers in the rear side of
the room.

E

R
1

9

2

3

X
Add the center speaker to configure a 3.1 system.

X
When using front presence speakers installed to the ceiling or when using the Dolby Enabled speakers as the
presence speakers, configure the “Layout (Front Presence)” setting in the “Setup” menu before performing YPAO
(p.42).

En

21

Presence speaker layout

Dolby Enabled SP
Use the Dolby Enabled speakers as the presence speakers.

The unit provides three layout patterns for presence speakers (Front Height, Overhead and
Dolby Enabled SP). Choose a layout pattern that suits your listening environment.

It utilizes sounds reflected from ceiling and lets you enjoy overhead sounds only from speakers

X

that are placed at the same level as traditional speakers.

You can enjoy Dolby Atmos, DTS:X or Cinema DSP HD3 with any layout pattern.

Front Height
Install the presence speakers on the front side wall.
It delivers a natural sound field with excellent linkage of left, right, top and bottom sound
spaces, and sound extensity effectively.

X
Place the Dolby Enabled speakers on top of or near the traditional front speakers. A Dolby Enabled speaker unit
may be integrated into a traditional speaker. For details, refer to the instruction manual of the Dolby Enabled
speakers.

Notes on installation of ceiling speakers
When installing presence speakers to a ceiling, install them just above the listening position,
or the ceiling between the extensions of the front speakers and listening position.

Overhead
Install the presence speakers to the ceiling above the listening position.
It delivers realistic overhead sound effects and sound field with excellent linkage of front and
rear sound spaces effectively.

Caution

Y

Be sure to use speakers that are made for ceiling use and take anti-drop measures. Ask a qualified
contractor or dealer personnel for installation works.

For details on the installation position of ceiling speakers, see “Notes on installation of ceiling speakers” (p.22).

En

22

■ Setting the speaker impedance

■ Connecting speakers

Under its default settings, the unit is configured for 8-ohm speakers. When using a 6-ohm

Connect the speakers placed in your room to the unit.

speaker for any channel, set the speaker impedance to “6 Ω MIN”. In this case, you can also use
Precaution for connecting of the speaker cables

4-ohm speakers as the front speakers.

1
2

Prepare speaker cables in a place away from the unit, to avoid accidentally dropping wire

Before connecting speakers, connect the power cable to an AC wall outlet.

strands into the unit's interior which could result in a short circuit or malfunction of the unit.
Improper connecting of the speaker cables may cause short circuit and also damage the unit

While holding down STRAIGHT on the front panel, press MAIN ZONE z.

or the speakers.

MAIN ZONE z

• Remove the unit’s power cable from an AC wall outlet and turn off the subwoofer before

STRAIGHT

connecting the speakers.
• Twist the bare wires of the speaker cables firmly together.

3

Check that “SPEAKER IMP.” is displayed on the front display.

SPEAKER¡IMP.
¡¡¡¡¡¡¡¡¡8¬MIN

4
5

• Do not let the bare wires of the speaker cable touch one another.

Press STRAIGHT to select “6 Ω MIN”.
Press MAIN ZONE z to set the unit to standby mode and remove the power
cable from the AC wall outlet.
• Do not let the bare wires of the speaker cable come into contact with the unit's metal parts

You are now ready to connect the speakers.

(rear panel and screws).

If “Check SP Wires” appear on the front display when the unit is turned on, turn off the unit, and
then check the speaker cables short circuit.

En

23

Connection diagram

Speakers to be connected

Refer to the following diagram and connect the speakers to the unit.

Speaker system
(the number of channels)

Speaker type
7.1/5.1.2

5.1

Front (L/R) 1 2

(

(

Center 3

(

(

Surround (L/R) 4 5

(

)*3

PRE OUT

ZONE OUT

(SINGLE)

1

2.1

2

The unit (rear)
ZONE 2

(

FRONT

SURROUND

SUR. BACK

SUBWOOFER

CENTER

SPEAKERS
R

SURROUND

L

R

EXTRA SP2
SURROUND BACK

L

R

EXTRA SP1
F.PRESENCE

L

CENTER

R

FRONT

L

SINGLE

Surround back (L/R) 6 7

)*1

Front presence (L/R) E R

)*2

)*4

(

(

Subwoofer 9

ZONE 2

ZONE 2/BI-AMP

(

If you have nine speakers, you can connect the both surround back speakers and front
E

presence speakers. In this case, the unit automatically changes the speakers to be used,

R

depending on the input signal and CINEMA DSP.

1

2

If you have seven speakers, use two of them as surround back speakers (*1) or front presence
speakers (*2).

9

3

9

If you have five speakers, use two of them as surround speakers (*3) or front presence speakers
(*4).

X

4

5

• You can also connect up to 2 subwoofers (with built-in amplifier) to the unit.

6

• When apply this speaker configuration, set “Power Amp Assign” (p.123) to “Basic” (default).

7

• To use an external power amplifier (Hi-Fi amplifier, etc.) to enhance speaker output, see “Connecting an
external power amplifier” (p.31).

Cables necessary for connection (commercially available)
Speaker cables (x the number of speakers)
+
–

Y

+
–

When using only one surround back speaker, connect it to the SINGLE jack (L side).

Audio pin cable (two for connecting two subwoofers)

En

24

Connecting speaker cables

Connecting the subwoofer (with built-in amplifier)

Speaker cables have two wires. One is for connecting the negative (-) terminal of the unit and

Use an audio pin cable to connect the subwoofer.

the speaker, and the other is for the positive (+) terminal. If the wires are colored to prevent

Audio pin cable

confusion, connect the black wire to the negative and the other wire to the positive terminal.

PRE

OUT

(SING

LE)

1

(FR
ONT)
1

Remove approximately 10 mm (3/8”) of insulation from the ends of the speaker cable, and
twist the bare wires of the cable firmly together.

2
SURR
UND

SUR.

BACK

SUBW
OOFE

R

2
3

Loosen the speaker terminal.

4

Tighten the terminal.

SURR
OUN

+

2

3

FR
ON

T

1

4
– (black)

Using a banana plug
(U.S.A., Canada, China, Brazil and General models only)

1

Tighten the speaker terminal.

2

Insert a banana plug into the end of the terminal.

1

+

ER

L

Insert the bare wires of the cable into the gap on the side (upper right or bottom left) of the
terminal.

+ (red)

CENT

D BA
CK

FR
ON

T

Banana plug

2

En

25

Advanced speaker configuration
In addition to the basic speaker configuration (p.18), the unit also allows you to apply the following speaker configurations to enhance your system.

Using the four internal
amplifiers for front speakers to
have more high-quality sounds

Bi-amp connection

Combining with an external
power amplifier (Hi-Fi
amplifier, etc.) to build an
extended system

Using the excess internal
amplifiers for stereo speakers
in another room

Power-amp channel expansion

(Example)

Multi-zone configuration

(Example)

(Example)
External power
amplifier

Bi-amp
connection

Zone2

Main zone

En

26

■ Available speaker configurations

7.1 +1Zone

Main zone
Output
channel
(max)

Bi-amp

7
7
5

)

7

)

Multi-zone

Power Amp Assign
(p.123)

Page

Surround back

+1 (Zone2)

7.1 +1Zone

27

Front presence

+1 (Zone2)

5.1.2 +1Zone

28

5.1 Bi-Amp

28

7.1 Bi-Amp [ext.SB]

29

Surround
back/ Front
presence

Surround back

External power
amplifier
(required)

Surround back

1
9

2

1

2

9

3

5

4

Y
6

When applying one of these configurations, you need to configure the “Power Amp Assign” setting in the “Setup”

7

menu (p.42).

Zone2

Main zone

Speaker

Connect to

12

FRONT

3

CENTER

45

SURROUND

67

SURROUND BACK

ER

(not used)

9

SUBWOOFER 1-2

Zone2 speakers

EXTRA SP1

X
When Zone2 output is enabled (p.98), the surround back speakers in the main zone do not output sound.

En

27

5.1.2 +1Zone

5.1 Bi-Amp
Bi-amp

E

R
1

9

2
3

1

2

1

9

4

9

5

4

2
3

9

5

Zone2

Main zone

Speaker

Connect to

Speaker

Connect to

12

FRONT

12

FRONT and EXTRA SP 1 (bi-amp connection)

3

CENTER

3

CENTER

45

SURROUND

45

SURROUND

67

(not used)

67

(not used)

ER

EXTRA SP1

ER

(not used)

9

SUBWOOFER 1-2

9

SUBWOOFER 1-2

Zone2 speakers

EXTRA SP2

X
When Zone2 output is enabled (p.98), the front presence speakers in the main zone do not output sound.

En

28

■ Connecting front speakers that support bi-amp
connections

7.1 Bi-Amp [ext.SB]
Bi-amp

When using front speakers that support bi-amp connections, connect them to the FRONT
terminals and EXTRA SP1 terminals.
1

To enable the bi-amp function, configure the “Power Amp Assign” setting in the “Setup” menu

2

after connecting the power cable to an AC wall outlet (p.42).
3

9

9

The unit (rear)
SPEAKERS
R

SURROUND

L

R

EXTRA SP2
SURROUND BACK

L

R

EXTRA SP1
F.PRESENCE

L

R

CENTER

FRONT

L

SINGLE

4

5

6

ZONE 2

ZONE 2/BI-AMP

7

1

2

via external amp

3
Speaker

Connect to

12

FRONT and EXTRA SP 1 (bi-amp connection)

3

CENTER

45

SURROUND

67

SUR.BACK (PRE OUT) via external power amplifier

ER

(not used)

9

SUBWOOFER 1-2

9

9

4

5

X
The FRONT terminals and EXTRA SP1 terminals output the same signals.

Caution
Before making bi-amp connections, remove any brackets or cables that connect a woofer with a
tweeter. Refer to the instruction manual of the speakers for details. If you are not making bi-amp
connections, make sure that the brackets or cables are connected before connecting the speaker
cables.

En

29

■ Connecting Zone2 speakers

(when using front presence speakers in the main zone)

When using Zone2 speakers, connect them to the EXTRA SP1 or EXTRA SP2 terminals.

The unit (rear)
SPEAKERS
R

To utilize the EXTRA SP terminals for Zone2 speakers, configure the “Power Amp Assign”

SURROUND

L

R

EXTRA SP2
SURROUND BACK

setting in the “Setup” menu after connecting the power cable to an AC wall outlet (p.42).

L

R

EXTRA SP1
F.PRESENCE

L

CENTER

R

FRONT

L

SINGLE

X

ZONE 2

ZONE 2/BI-AMP

You can also connect Zone2 speakers using an external amplifier (p.95).

(when using surround back speakers in the main zone)
E

The unit (rear)
R

SURROUND

L

EXTRA SP1
R
F.PRESENCE

L

L

CENTER

R

FRONT

2

FL

FR

L

9

SINGLE

ZONE 2

R
1

SPEAKERS
EXTRA SP2
R
SURROUND BACK

3

9

ZONE 2/BI-AMP

4

5

Zone2
1

9

2

3

FL

FR

Main zone

9

4

5

6

7

Zone2

Main zone

En

30

■ Connecting an external power amplifier

(Example)

When connecting an external power amplifier to enhance speaker output, connect the input

Connecting front speakers via an external power amplifier

jacks of the power amplifier to the PRE OUT jacks of the unit. The same channel signals are

PRE OUT (FRONT) jacks

output from the PRE OUT jacks as from their corresponding SPEAKERS terminals.

HDMI (HDCP2.2)
V2

AV 3

NETWORK

AV 4

AV 5

AV 6

( 3 NET )

AV 7

Main input jack
TRIGGER
OUT

NT VIDEO

PB

Caution

PR

1

REMOTE

12V 0.1A
MAX. TOTAL

• To prevent the generation of loud noises or abnormal sounds, make sure the followings before making
connections.

IN

RS-232C

MAIN IN

OUT

PR

2
PR

PB

PRE OUT

(SINGLE)

1

L

L

2

– Remove the power cable of the unit and turn off the external power amplifier before connecting them.
FRONT

SURROUND

SUR. BACK

SUBWOOFER

CENTER

R

SPEAKERS

– When using the PRE OUT jacks, do not connect speakers to the corresponding SPEAKERS terminals.

ROUND

L

R

EXTRA SP2
SURROUND BACK

L

R

EXTRA SP1
F.PRESENCE

L

CENTER

FRONT

– When using a pre-main amplifier that does not have the volume control bypass, turn up the volume
of the pre-main amplifier enough and fix it. In this case, do not connect other devices (except the
unit) to the pre-main amplifier.

R

R
FRONT

L

SUR

SINGLE

ZONE 2

ZONE 2/BI-AMP

The unit (rear)
The unit (rear)
HDMI (HDCP2.2)
AV 1

AV 2

AV 3

NETWORK

AV 4

AV 5

AV 6

( 3 NET )

AV 7

(1 BD/DVD)

AC IN

TRIGGER
OUT

COMPONENT VIDEO

Y

AV 1

PR

PB

A

1

REMOTE

12V 0.1A
MAX. TOTAL

IN

RS-232C

OUT

2
B

Y

PR

PB

AV 2

PRE OUT

ZONE OUT

(SINGLE)

1

2

ZONE 2

FRONT

SURROUND

SUR. BACK

SUBWOOFER

CENTER

SPEAKERS
R

SURROUND

L

R

EXTRA SP2
SURROUND BACK

L

R

EXTRA SP1
F.PRESENCE

L

CENTER

R

FRONT

L

SINGLE

ZONE 2

a bc

ZONE 2/BI-AMP

d

a FRONT jacks

About external power amplifiers

Output front channel sounds.

We recommend using power amplifiers that meet the following conditions.

b SURROUND jacks

• With unbalanced inputs

Output surround channel sounds.

c SUR. BACK jacks

• With volume control bypass (or without volume control circuit)

Output surround back channel sounds. When using only one surround back speaker, connect the
external amplifier to the SINGLE jack (L side).

• Output power: 100 W or more (6 to 8 Ω)

d CENTER jack
Outputs center channel sounds.

En

31

Amplifier with
volume control
bypass
(such as A-S3000)

2 Connecting a TV and playback devices
Connect a TV and playback devices (video and audio devices) to the unit.
For information on how to connect a USB storage device, see “Connecting a USB storage device” (p.82).

Input/output jacks and cables
The unit is equipped with the following input/output jacks. Prepare the cables that match the jacks on your devices.

■ Video/audio jacks

■ Video jacks

■ Audio jacks

To input/output video and audio signals, use the following

To input only video signals, use the following jacks.

To input/output only audio signals, use the following jacks.

jacks.

COMPONENT VIDEO jacks
HDMI jacks

OPTICAL jacks

Transmit video signals separated into three components:

Transmit digital audio signals. Use a digital optical cable.

Transmit digital video and digital sound through a single

luminance (Y), chrominance blue (Pb), and chrominance red

Remove the tip protector (if available) before using the cable.

jack. Use an HDMI cable.

(Pr). Use a component video cable with three plugs.
Digital optical cable

AV 1

Component video cable

HDMI cable
O
T VIDE
ONEN
COMVP 1
PB
A

Y

PR

A

COAXIAL jacks

Y
Use a 19-pin HDMI cable with the HDMI logo. We recommend using a
cable less than 5.0 m (16.4 ft) long to prevent signal quality degradation.

X

Transmit digital audio signals. Use a digital coaxial cable.

VIDEO jacks
Digital coaxial cable

Transmit analog video signals. Use a video pin cable.

• The unit’s HDMI jacks support the HDMI Control, Audio Return Channel
(ARC), and 3D and 4K Ultra HD video transmission features.

AV 1

Video pin cable

• Use high speed HDMI cables to enjoy 3D or 4K Ultra HD videos.
VIDEO

AUDIO jacks
Transmit analog stereo audio signals. Use a stereo pin cable
(RCA cable).
AUDIO3

En

32

Stereo pin cable

Connecting a TV

About Audio Return Channel (ARC)

Connect a TV to the unit so that video input to the unit can be output to the TV.

• ARC allows audio signals to travel both ways. If you connect a TV that supports ARC to the unit with a
single HDMI cable, you can output video/audio to the TV or input TV audio to the unit.

You can also enjoy playback of TV audio on the unit.

• When using ARC, connect a TV with an HDMI cable that supports ARC.

■ HDMI connection

■ Connecting another TV or a projector

Connect the TV to the unit with an HDMI cable and an audio cable (digital optical or stereo pin

The unit has two HDMI output jacks. If you connect another TV or a projector to the unit with

cable).

an HDMI cable, you can switch the TV (or projector) to be used for watching videos with the

Y

remote control (p.60).

You can connect another TV or a projector by using the HDMI OUT 2 jack (p.33).
HDMI

HDMI OUT jack
HDMI OUT
(HDCP2.2)

2

The unit
(rear)

HDMI OUT 2 jack
HDMI OUT

ARC

HDMI

(HDCP2.2)

2

The unit
(rear)

1

(ZONE OUT)

1

(ZONE OUT)

ARC

TV

HDMI OUT
(HDCP2.2)

AV 1

AV 2

(1 BD/DVD)

(HDCP2.2)

2

HDMI OUT
2

1
ARC

(ZONE OUT)

AV 3

AV 1

AV 2

AV 4

AV 1

COMPONENT VIDEO

Y

AV 1

PB

A

AV 2

(1 BD/DVD)

1
ARC

(ZONE OUT)

HDMI input

(1 BD/DVD)

AV 3

AV 1

AV 2

(1 BD/DVD)

AV 4

COMPONENT VIDEO

Y

AV 1

A

PR

HDMI

VIDEO

PB

PR

PB

PR

VIDEO

B
B

PHONO
L

AUDIO 1

AUDIO 2

Y

AUDIO 3

(2 TV)

PHONO

PR

PB

AV 2

HDMI

ZONE OUT

L

L

AUDIO 1

AUDIO 2

Y

AUDIO 3

(2 TV)

R

AV 2

ZONE OUT

L

R

HDMI

R

R

AUDIO 1

AUDIO

(2 TV)
GND

1 OPTICAL

2 OPTICAL

3 COAXIAL

4 COAXIAL

5 COAXIAL

ZONE 2

6 OPTICAL

R

GND

3 COAXIAL

4 COAXIAL

5 COAXIAL

6 OPTICAL

ZONE 2

L

L

R

R

R

HDMI input

FRONT
SURROUND

HDMI

L

ANTENNA
(4 RADIO)

75ȍ

(4 RADIO)

FM

2 OPTICAL

L

L

ANTENNA
75ȍ

1 OPTICAL

FRONT
SURROUND

FM

AM

AM

R

TV

1 OPTICAL

Projector

OPTICAL
O

AUDIO 1
(OPTICAL or AUDIO) jacks

TV (already connected)

O

Y

Audio output
(digital optical or analog stereo)

• HDMI Control is not available on the HDMI OUT 2 jack.

X

• If you set “HDMI OUT2 Assign” (p.136) in the “Setup” menu to “Zone2”, you can connect a video monitor for
Zone2 to the HDMI OUT 2 jack and enjoy videos and audio using the video monitor (p.96).

• You do not make an audio cable connection between the TV and the unit in the following cases:
– If your TV supports Audio Return Channel (ARC)
– If you will receive TV broadcasts only from the set-top box
• If you connect a TV that supports HDMI Control to the unit with an HDMI cable, you can control the unit’s power
and volume with the TV’s remote control.

To use HDMI Control and ARC, you need to configure the HDMI settings on the unit. For details
on the settings, see “Information on HDMI” (p.165).

En

33

Connecting video devices (such as BD/DVD players)

■ Component video connection
Connect a video device to the unit with a component video cable and an audio cable (digital

Connect video devices such as BD/DVD players, set-top boxes (STBs) and game consoles to the

coaxial or stereo pin cable). Choose a set of input jacks (on the unit) depending on the audio

unit. Depending on the video/audio output jacks available on your video device, choose one of

output jacks available on your video device.

the following connections. We recommend using an HDMI connection if the video device has
an HDMI output jack.

Output jacks on video device
Input jacks on the unit

Y

Video

Audio

The following explanation is based on the assumption that you have not changed the “Input Assignment” setting

Digital coaxial

AV 1-2 (COMPONENT VIDEO + COAXIAL)

Analog stereo

AV 1-2 (COMPONENT VIDEO + AUDIO)

Component video

(p.137) in the “Setup” menu. As necessary, you can assign the COMPONENT VIDEO (A, B), COAXIAL (3, 4, 5)
and OPTICAL (1, 2, 6) jacks to another input source.

X

AV 1-2 (COMPONENT VIDEO) jacks

If you make more than one audio connection for one input source, an audio signal played back on the unit will be
determined according to the “Audio Select” setting (p.109) in the “Option” menu.

Y

The unit (rear)
(HDCP2.2)

2

AV 1

AV 2

(1 BD/DVD)

1
ARC

(ZONE OUT)

PR

HDMI (HDCP2.2)

HDMI OUT

■ HDMI connection

PB

AV 3

AV 1

AV 2

AV 3

AV 4

AV 5

AV 6

(1 BD/DVD)

AV 4

TRIGG
OUT

COMPONENT VIDEO

Y

AV 1

PR

PB

A

1
VIDEO

PR

Y

PB

Connect a video device to the unit with an HDMI cable.

Video output
(component video)

12V 0.1A
MAX. TOTAL

2
B

PHONO
L

HDMI (AV 1-7) jacks

The unit (rear)

AUDIO 1

AUDIO 2

Y

AUDIO 3

(2 TV)

AV 2

PRE OUT

ZONE OUT

L

R

PR

PB

(SINGLE)

1

R

2

PR
HDMI (HDCP2.2)

I OUT

CP2.2)

1
ARC

AV 1

AV 2

AV 3

GND

NE

AV 4

AV 5

AV 6

1 OPTICAL

2 OPTICAL

3 COAXIAL

4 COAXIAL

5 COAXIAL

ZONE 2

6 OPTICAL

FRONT

SURROUND

SUR. BACK

SUBWOOFER

R

(1 BD/DVD)

SURROUND

L

R

EXTRA SP2
SURROUND BACK

Y

PB

PR

CENTER

SPEAKERS

AV 7

L

R

PB

EXTRA SP1
F.PRESENC

Y
AV 3

AV 4

TRIGGER
OUT

COMPONENT VIDEO

Y

AV 1

PR

PB

A

ANTENNA
(4 RADIO)

1

75ȍ

REMOTE

12V 0.1A
MAX. TOTAL

IN

FM

AM

SINGLE

HDMI output

OUT

2
B

Y

PR

PB

AV 2

C

HDMI
PRE OUT

ZONE OUT

(SINGLE)

C
ZONE 2

ZONE 2/BI-AM

1

COAXIAL

HDMI
2

6 OPTICAL

ZONE 2

FRONT

SURROUND

SUR. BACK

SUBWOOFER

L

HDMI

CENTER

Video device

SPEAKERS
R

SURROUND

L

R

EXTRA SP2
SURROUND BACK

L

R

EXTRA SP1
F.PRESENCE

L

CENTER

L

L

R

R

R
SINGLE

ZONE 2

ZONE 2/BI-AMP

Video device

AV 1-2 (COAXIAL) or
AV 1-2 (AUDIO) jacks

If you select the input source by pressing AV 1-7 on the remote control, the video/audio played
back on the video device will be output from the unit.

Audio output
(digital or analog stereo)

If you select the input source by pressing AV 1-2 on the remote control, the video/audio played
back on the video device will be output from the unit.

X
To connect a video device to the unit with a component video cable and a digital optical cable, use “Input
Assignment” (p.137) in the “Setup” menu to assign the COMPONENT VIDEO and OPTICAL jacks to the same input
source.

En

34

■ Composite video connection
Connect a video device to the unit with a video pin cable and an audio cable (digital coaxial,
digital optical, or stereo pin cable). Choose a set of input jacks (on the unit) depending on the
audio output jacks available on your video device.
Output jacks on video device
Input jacks on the unit
Video

Audio

Composite video

Digital coaxial

AV 1-2 (VIDEO + COAXIAL)

Digital optical

AV 3 (VIDEO + OPTICAL)

Analog stereo

AV 1-4 (VIDEO + AUDIO)

The unit (rear)
HDMI OUT
(HDCP2.2)

2

AV 1

AV 2

(1 BD/DVD)

1

AV 1

ARC

(ZONE OUT)

AV 3

(1 BD/DVD

AV 4

AV 1-4 (VIDEO)
jacks

COM

Y

AV

A

Video output
(composite video)

VIDEO

V

B

PHONO
L

AUDIO 1

AUDIO 2

Y

AUDIO 3

(2 TV)

R

AV

ZON

L

VIDEO

R

GND

1 OPTICAL

2 OPTICAL

3 COAXIAL

4 COAXIAL

5 COAXIAL

V

ZONE 2

6 OPTICAL

R

ANTENNA
(4 RADIO)

75ȍ

FM

AM

C

C
COAXIAL

O

Video device

O

L
L

L

R

R

OPTICAL

R

Any of AV 1-2 (COAXIAL),
AV 3 (OPTICAL),
AV 1-4 (AUDIO) jacks

Audio output
(any of digital coaxial, digital optical,
analog stereo)

If you select the input source by pressing AV 1-4 on the remote control, the video/audio played
back on the video device will be output from the unit.

En

35

Connecting audio devices (such as CD players)

PHONO jacks

Audio output
(PHONO)

PHONO

Connect audio devices such as CD players and a turntable to the unit. Depending on the audio

PHONO
L

L

output jacks available on your audio device, choose one of the following connections.

Y

L

L

R

R

R

R

The following explanation is based on the assumption that you have not changed the “Input Assignment” setting
(p.137) in the “Setup” menu. As necessary, you can assign the COAXIAL (3, 4, 5) and OPTICAL (1, 2, 6) jacks

Ground lead

GND

GND

to another input source.
HDMI OUT
(HDCP2.2)

2

X

AV 2

If you make more than one audio connection for one input source, an audio signal played back on the unit will be

AV 3

AV 1

AV 2

(1 BD/DVD)

AV 4

AV 1

A

PHONO
L

AUDIO 1

AUDIO 2

Y

AUDIO 3

(2 TV)

PR

Audio input jacks on the unit

AV 2

PB

PR

ZONE OUT

L

R

GND

1 OPTICAL

2 OPTICAL

3 COAXIAL

4 COAXIAL

5 COAXIAL

ZONE 2

6 OPTICAL

R

Digital optical

PB

B

R

Digital coaxial

FRONT
SURROUND

Turntable (PHONO)

L

AV 1-2 (COAXIAL)
ANTENNA
(4 RADIO)

AUDIO 3 (COAXIAL)

75ȍ

FM

AM

C

AV 3 (OPTICAL)

C
COAXIAL

AUDIO 1-2 (OPTICAL)
O

Analog stereo

Turntable

COMPONENT VIDEO

Y

VIDEO

determined according to the “Audio Select” setting (p.109) in the “Option” menu.

Audio output jacks on audio device

1
ARC

(ZONE OUT)

AV 1

(1 BD/DVD)

AV 1-4 (AUDIO)

The unit
(rear)

AUDIO 1-3 (AUDIO)

Audio device

O

L
L

L

R

R

PHONO

OPTICAL

R

Any of AV 1-4, AUDIO 1-3
(COAXIAL, OPTICAL, AUDIO) jacks

Audio output
(any of digital coaxial, digital optical,
analog stereo)

If you select the input source by pressing AV 1-4, AUDIO 1-3 or PHONO on the remote control,
the audio played back on the audio device will be output from the unit.
When connecting a turntable
• The PHONO jack of the unit is compatible with an MM cartridge. To connect a turntable with a
low-output MC cartridge, use a boosting transformer.
• Connecting the turntable to the GND terminal of the unit may reduce noise in the signal.

En

36

Connecting to the jacks on the front panel

■ Analog stereo connection
Connect an audio playback device (such as CD players) to the unit with a stereo pin cable.

Use the VIDEO AUX jack to temporarily connect a playback device to the unit.
ENTER

Use the USB jack to connect a USB storage device. For details, see “Connecting a USB storage

ZONE 2
RETURN

device” (p.82).

ZONE CONTROL

DISPLAY

VIDEO AUX

PHONES
USB

Before making a connection, stop playback on the device and turn down the volume on the

5V

1A

YPAO MIC

SILENT CINEMA

L

L

unit.

AUDIO

R

HDMI IN

R

The unit (front)

■ HDMI connection
Connect an HDMI-compatible device (such as game consoles and camcorders) to the unit with
an HDMI cable.
ENTER
ZONE 2
RETURN

ZONE CONTROL

DISPLAY

VIDEO AUX

PHONES
USB

5V

1A

YPAO MIC

SILENT CINEMA

L

AUDIO

R

HDMI IN

HDMI

Audio device

The unit (front)

If you select “VIDEO AUX” as the input source by pressing V-AUX, the audio played back on the
device will be output from the unit.

Game console

X
• If you connect devices to both the VIDEO AUX (HDMI IN) jack and VIDEO AUX (AUDIO) jacks, the unit outputs
audio input through the VIDEO AUX (HDMI IN) jack.
• If you connect video devices to both the VIDEO AUX (HDMI IN) jack and VIDEO AUX (AUDIO) jacks, the unit

Camcorder

outputs video/audio input through the VIDEO AUX (HDMI IN) jack.

If you select “VIDEO AUX” as the input source by pressing V-AUX on the remote control, the
video/audio played back on the device will be output from the unit.

Y
• You need to prepare an HDMI cable that matches the output jacks on your device.
• The VIDEO AUX (HDMI IN) jack does not support HDCP 2.2.

En

37

3 Connecting the radio antennas
Connect the supplied radio antenna to the unit.

Connecting the AM antenna
Hold down

Insert

Release

FM/AM antennas (except Australia, U.K., Europe and
Russia models)

X

Connect the supplied FM/AM antennas to the unit.

• Unwind only the length of cable needed from the AM antenna unit.

Fix the end of the FM antenna to a wall, and place the AM antenna on a flat surface.

• The wires of the AM antenna have no polarity.

FM antenna
AM antenna

DAB/FM antenna (Australia, U.K., Europe and Russia
models only)
(HDCP2.2)

AV 1

AV 2

(1 BD/DVD)

Connect the supplied DAB/FM antenna to the unit and fix the antenna ends to a wall.

HDMI (HDCP2.2)

HDMI OUT
2

1
ARC

(ZONE OUT)

AV 3

AV 1

AV 2

AV 3

AV 4

AV 5

AV 6

AV 7

(1 BD/DVD)

AV 4

TRIGGER
OUT

COMPONENT VIDEO

Y

AV 1

PB

A

PR

1

DAB/FM antenna

R

12V 0.1A
MAX. TOTAL

VIDEO

IN

2
B

PHONO
L

AUDIO 1

AUDIO 2

Y

AUDIO 3

(2 TV)

L

R

PR

PB

AV 2

ZONE OUT

PRE OUT

(SINGLE)

SURROUND

SUR. BACK

1

R

GND

1 OPTICAL

2 OPTICAL

3 COAXIAL

2

4 COAXIAL

5 COAXIAL

6 OPTICAL

ZONE 2

FRONT

SUBWOOFER

CENTER

SPEAKERS
R

SURROUND

L

EXTRA SP2
R
SURROUND BACK

L

R

EXTRA SP1
F.PRESENCE

L

The unit (rear)
ANTENNA
(4 RADIO)

75ȍ

FM

AV 1

AM

(1 BD/DVD)

SINGLE

AV 2

AV 3

AV 4

TRIGGER
OUT

COMPONENT VIDEO

Y

AV 1

PR

PB

A

1

RE

12V 0.1A
MAX. TOTAL

VIDEO

IN

2
ZONE 2

ZONE 2/BI-AMP

B

PHONO
L

The unit (rear)

AUDIO 1

AUDIO 2

Y

AUDIO 3

(2 TV)

ZONE OUT

L

R

PR

PB

AV 2

PRE OUT

(SINGLE)

SURROUND

SUR. BACK

1

R

GND

1 OPTICAL

2 OPTICAL

3 COAXIAL

2

4 COAXIAL

5 COAXIAL

6 OPTICAL

ZONE 2

FRONT

SUBWOOFER

CENTER

SPEAKERS
R

Assembling the AM antenna

SURROUND

L

EXTRA SP2
R
SURROUND BACK

L

R

EXTRA SP1
F.PRESENCE

L

DAB/FM
ANTENNA
(4 RADIO)
(4 RADIO)

7575ȍ

FM

AM

SINGLE

ZONE 2

ZONE 2/BI-AMP

Y
• The antenna should be stretched out horizontally.
• If you cannot obtain good reception on the radio, adjust the height, direction or placement of the DAB/FM
antenna.

En

38

4 Connecting a network cable or preparing the wireless antenna
Connect the unit to a router (access point) with a network cable, or prepare the wireless

Y

antenna for establishing a wireless network connection.

• Some security software installed on your PC or the firewall settings of network devices (such as a router) may
block the access of the unit to the network devices or the Internet. In these cases, configure the security

You can enjoy Internet radio or music files stored on media servers, such as PCs and Network

software or firewall settings appropriately.

Attached Storage (NAS), on the unit.

• Each server must be connected to the same subnet as the unit.
• To use the service via the Internet, broadband connection is strongly recommended.

Connecting the network cable

Preparing the wireless antenna

Connect the unit to your router with a commercially-available STP network cable (CAT-5 or
higher straight cable).

If you want to establish a wireless network connection, stand the wireless antenna up straight.
Network Attached Storage
(NAS)

Internet

For information on how to connect the unit to a network device wirelessly, see “Connecting to
a network device wirelessly” (p.51).

WAN

LAN

Modem

PC
Network cable
Router

The unit (rear)
NETWORK
AV 6

( 3 NET )

AV 7

AC IN

Mobile device

TRIGGER
OUT
1
12V 0.1A
MAX. TOTAL

REMOTE
IN

RS-232C

Y

OUT

2

Do not apply excessive force on the antenna. Doing so may damage it.

X
• If you want to use a wired (network cable) connection when a wireless connection has been made, set “Network
Connection” (p.131) in the “Setup” menu to “Wired”.
• If you are using a router that supports DHCP, you do not need to configure any network settings for the unit, as
the network parameters (such as the IP address) will be assigned automatically to it. You only need to configure
the network settings if your router does not support DHCP or if you want to configure the network parameters
manually (p.131).
• You can check whether the network parameters (such as IP address) are properly assigned to the unit in
“Network” (p.141) in the “Information” menu.

En

39

5 Connecting other devices

6 Connecting the power cable

Connect a device compatible with the trigger function.

Before connecting the power cable (Brazil and General models only)
Set the switch position of VOLTAGE SELECTOR according to your local voltage. Voltages are
AC 110–120/220–240 V, 50/60 Hz.

Connecting a device compatible with the trigger
function

Y
Make sure you set VOLTAGE SELECTOR of the unit BEFORE plugging the power cable into an AC wall outlet.
Improper setting of VOLTAGE SELECTOR may cause damage to the unit and create a potential fire hazard.

The trigger function can control an external device in conjunction with operating the unit (such
as powering on/off and input selection). If you have a Yamaha subwoofer that supports a

The unit (rear)

system connection or a device with a trigger input jack, you can use the trigger function by

NETWORK

( 3 NET )

AV 7

connecting the external device to one of the TRIGGER OUT jacks with a monaural mini-plug

AC IN

GGER
OUT
REMOTE

cable.

.1A
TAL

IN

RS-232C

VOLTAGE SELECTOR

OUT

VOLTAGE SELECTOR

220V240V

TRIGGER OUT 1-2 jacks
The unit (rear)
HDMI (HDCP2.2)
3

NETWORK

AV 4

AV 5

AV 6

AV 7

REMOTE
IN

OUT

2

ROUND

SUR. BACK

SP1
NCE

R

CENTER

FRONT

L

RS-232C

2
-AMP

1

System connector
jack

2

SUBWOOFER

CENTER

After all the connections are complete, connect the supplied power cable to the unit and then

SPEAKERS
R

L

( 3 NET )

12V 0.1A
MAX. TOTAL

1

(SINGLE)

ERS

1

TRIGGER
OUT

12V 0.1A
MAX. TOTAL

E OUT

110V120V

TRIGGER
OUT

EXTRA SP2
SURROUND BACK

L

R

EXTRA SP1
F.PRESENCE

L

CENTER

R

FRONT

L

to an AC wall outlet.

SINGLE

ZONE 2

ZONE 2/BI-AMP

The unit (rear)
NETWORK

Yamaha subwoofer that
supports a system connection

( 3 NET )

AC IN

OTE

RS-232C

To an AC wall outlet

OUT

X
You can configure the trigger function settings in “Trigger Output1” and “Trigger Output2” (p.138) in the “Setup”
menu.

CENTER

En

40

R

FRONT

L

7 Selecting an on-screen menu language
z
AV

1

5

2

3

4

6

7

V-AUX

1

2

3

PHONO

BLUETOOTH

USB

NET

PARTY

HDMI OUT

MAIN

ZONE 2

Japanese, French, German, Spanish, Russian, Italian and Chinese.

1
2

AUDIO

TUNER

Select the desired on-screen menu language from English (default),

2

3

Use the cursor keys (e/r) to select “Language” and the
cursor keys (q/w) to select the desired language.

Press z (receiver power) to turn on the unit.
Turn on the TV and switch the TV input to display video
from the unit (HDMI OUT jack).

X

SCENE

1

5

4

If you turn on the unit for the first time, the message regarding the network
setup appears. For now, press RETURN and proceed to Step 3.
PROGRAM

MUTE

TOP MENU

VOLUME

POP-UP/MENU

ON
SCREEN

ON SCREEN

OPTION

ENTER

RETURN

DISPLAY

Cursor keys
ENTER
RETURN

3
4

Press ON SCREEN.
Use the cursor keys to select “Setup” and press ENTER.

SUR. DECODE STRAIGHT
MUSIC

INFO

SLEEP

1

2

3

5

6

7

8

9

0

MEMORY

ENT

To exit from the menu, press ON SCREEN.

The information on the front display is provided in English only.

PRESET

MOVIE

To confirm the setting, press ENTER.

X

BAND
MODE

TUNING

6
7

ENHANCER PURE DIRECT

4

En

41

8 Configuring the necessary speaker settings
z
AV

1

2

3

4

6

7

V-AUX

If you use any of the following speaker configurations, follow the
procedure below to configure the corresponding speaker settings

6

manually before performing YPAO.
5

1

2

3

PHONO

TUNER

BLUETOOTH

USB

NET

• When using bi-amp connection or Zone2 speakers, select “Power
Amp Assign” (p.123), then select your speaker system.

• Advanced speaker configuration (p.26)

AUDIO

• When using the surround speakers for front 5.1-channel system

• Using the surround speakers for front 5.1-channel system (Virtual

(Virtual CINEMA FRONT), select “Configuration” ! “Layout” !

CINEMA FRONT) (p.20)
MAIN

PARTY

ZONE 2

HDMI OUT

“Surround” (p.124), then select “Front”.

• Using the presence speakers for Dolby Atmos or DTS:X playback (p.22)

• When using the presence speakers for Dolby Atmos or DTS:X

SCENE

1

2

PROGRAM

3

MUTE

TOP MENU

Configure the corresponding speaker settings.

4

1
2

VOLUME

POP-UP/MENU

ON
SCREEN

RETURN

DISPLAY
BAND

MODE

TUNING

PRESET

SUR. DECODE STRAIGHT
MOVIE

MUSIC

INFO

SLEEP

1

2

5

6

7

8

9

0

MEMORY

ENT

ENHANCER PURE DIRECT

3

4

Presence” (p.125), then select your front presence speaker

If you turn on the unit for the first time, the message regarding the network
setup appears. For now, press RETURN and proceed to Step 3.

3
4
5

layout.

7

X
Cursor keys
ENTER
RETURN

playback, select “Configuration” ! “Layout” ! “Front

Turn on the TV and switch the TV input to display video
from the unit (HDMI OUT jack).

ON SCREEN

OPTION

ENTER

Press z (receiver power) to turn on the unit.

Press ON SCREEN.
Use the cursor keys to select “Setup” and press ENTER.
Use the cursor keys and ENTER to select “Speaker” and
then “Manual Setup”.

En

42

To exit from the menu, press ON SCREEN.

9 Optimizing the speaker settings automatically (YPAO)
z
AV

1

5

2

3

4

6

7

V-AUX

AUDIO

1

2

3

PHONO

TUNER

BLUETOOTH

USB

NET

PARTY

HDMI OUT

The Yamaha Parametric room Acoustic Optimizer (YPAO) function
detects speaker connections, measures the distances from them to your

ZONE 2

connect it to the YPAO MIC jack on the front panel.

settings, such as volume balance and acoustic parameters, to suit your

X
Place the YPAO microphone at your listening position (same height as your

X

ears). We recommend the use of a tripod as a microphone stand. You can use the

The YPAO function of the unit adopts the YPAO-R.S.C. (Reflected Sound Control)
2

PROGRAM

3

MUTE

tripod screws to stabilize the microphone.

technology that enables to create natural sound fields like a room specifically designed

SCENE

1

Place the YPAO microphone at your listening position and

listening position(s), and then automatically optimizes the speaker
room.

MAIN

4

4

YPAO MIC
jack

for acoustic perfection.

Y

VOLUME

YPAO MIC

Note the following regarding YPAO measurement.
TOP MENU

– Test tones are output at high volume and may surprise or frighten small children.

POP-UP/MENU

ON
SCREEN

– Test tone volume cannot be adjusted.

OPTION

1

– Keep the room as quiet as possible.
ENTER

– Stay in a corner of the room behind the listening position so that you do not become
an obstacle between speakers and the YPAO microphone.

RETURN

DISPLAY

The unit (front)

RETURN

9

– Do not connect headphones.

2

3

BAND
MODE

TUNING

PRESET

SUR. DECODE STRAIGHT
MOVIE

MUSIC

INFO

SLEEP

1

2

3

5

6

7

8

9

0

MEMORY

ENT

ENHANCER PURE DIRECT

4

1
2

Press z (receiver power) to turn on the unit.
4

Turn on the TV and switch the TV input to display video

YPAO
5
microphone

from the unit (HDMI OUT jack).

X

Ear height

If you turn on the unit for the first time, the message regarding the network
setup appears. For now, press RETURN and proceed to Step 3.

3

The following screen appears on the TV.

Turn on the subwoofer and set the volume to half. If the
crossover frequency is adjustable, set it to maximum.
VOLUME

MIN

MAX

CROSSOVER/
HIGH CUT

MIN

9

MAX

X
To cancel the operation, disconnect the YPAO microphone before starting the
measurement.
En

43

5

If desired, change the measuring method (multi/single).

1

Use the cursor keys to select “Multi Position” and press ENTER.

2

Use the cursor keys to select a setting and then press ENTER.

Single measure

Multi measure
(5 listening positions)

AV

1

2

3

4

5

6

7

V-AUX

AUDIO

1

2

3

PHONO

TUNER

BLUETOOTH

USB

NET

a

d

e
bac

MAIN

PARTY

ZONE 2

HDMI OUT

SCENE

1

2

PROGRAM

3

MUTE

4

VOLUME

Settings
TOP MENU

POP-UP/MENU

ON
SCREEN

Yes

Select this option if you will have several listening positions
or if you want others to enjoy surround sound. You can take
measurements at up to 8 different positions in the room.
The speaker settings will be optimized to suit the area
defined by those positions (multi measure).

No (default)

Select this option if your listening position will always be
fixed. Take the measurements at only one position. The
speaker settings will be optimized to suit that position
(single measure).

OPTION

Cursor keys
ENTER

ENTER

RETURN

DISPLAY
BAND

MODE

TUNING

PRESET

SUR. DECODE STRAIGHT
MOVIE

MUSIC

INFO

SLEEP

1

2

3

4

5

6

7

8

9

0

MEMORY

ENT

ENHANCER PURE DIRECT

Multi measure
(1 listening position +
front/back/left/right)

Multi measure
(2 listening positions +
front/back)

b
c a e
d

c
a b
d

X
• If you perform the multi measure, the speaker settings will be optimized for
you to enjoy surround sound in a wider space.

This completes the preparations. See the following page to start the

• If you perform the multi measure, first place the YPAO microphone at the

measurement.

listening position you will be seated most frequently.

When “Multi Position” is set to “Yes”:
“Measuring at multiple listening positions (multi measure)” (p.46)
When “Multi Position” is set to “No”:
“Measuring at one listening position (single measure)” (p.45)

En

44

Measuring at one listening position
(single measure)
5

2

3

4

6

7

V-AUX

To save the measurement results, use the cursor keys
(e/r) to select “SAVE” and press ENTER.

When “Multi Position” is set to “No”, follow the procedure below for

AV

1

3

measurement. It takes about 3 minutes to perform the measurement.

AUDIO

1

2

3

PHONO

TUNER

BLUETOOTH

USB

NET

PARTY

HDMI OUT

1

To start the measurement, use the cursor keys to select
“Measure” and press ENTER.

MAIN

ZONE 2

The measurement will start in 10 seconds. Press ENTER again to

SCENE

1

2

3

start the measurement immediately.

4

X
PROGRAM

MUTE

TOP MENU

VOLUME

POP-UP/MENU

ON
SCREEN

The adjusted speaker settings are applied.

To cancel the measurement temporarily, press RETURN.

X

The following screen appears on the TV when the measurement

To finish the measurement without saving the result, select “CANCEL”.

finishes.

4

OPTION

ENTER

RETURN

DISPLAY

Use the cursor keys (e/r) to select “YES” or “NO” to
enable/disable YPAO Volume and press ENTER.

Cursor keys
ENTER
RETURN

BAND
MODE

TUNING

PRESET

SUR. DECODE STRAIGHT
MOVIE

MUSIC

INFO

SLEEP

1

2

3

5

6

7

8

9

0

MEMORY

ENT

ENHANCER PURE DIRECT

4

Y
If any error message (such as E-1) or warning message (such as W-1) appears, see
“Error messages” (p.49) or “Warning messages” (p.50).

X

X

• If YPAO Volume is enabled, the high- and low-frequency levels are
automatically adjusted according to the volume so that you can enjoy natural

To check the measurement results, select “Result”. For details, see “Checking

sounds even at low volume.

the measurement results” (p.47).

• You can also enable/disable YPAO Volume in “YPAO Volume” (p.107) in the

2

“Option” menu.

Use the cursor keys to select “Save/Cancel” and press

5

ENTER.

Disconnect the YPAO microphone from the unit.

This completes optimization of the speaker settings.
Caution
The YPAO microphone is sensitive to heat, so should not be placed anywhere
where it could be exposed to direct sunlight or high temperatures (such as on
top of AV equipment).
En

45

Measuring at multiple listening positions
(multi measure)
AV

1

5

2

3

4

6

7

V-AUX

AUDIO

1

2

3

PHONO

TUNER

BLUETOOTH

USB

NET

PARTY

HDMI OUT

3

When the measurements at the positions you want to

When “Multi Position” is set to “Yes”, follow the procedure below for

measure are completed, use the cursor keys to select
“CANCEL” and press ENTER.

measurement. It takes about 10 minutes to measure 8 listening

When you have taken measurements at 8 listening positions, the

positions.

following screen appears automatically.

Y
If any error message (such as E-1) or warning message (such as W-1) appears, see “Error

MAIN

ZONE 2

messages” (p.49) or “Warning messages” (p.50).

SCENE

1

2

PROGRAM

3

MUTE

1

4

To start the measurement, use the cursor keys to select
“Measure” and press ENTER.

VOLUME

The measurement will start in 10 seconds. Press ENTER again to
TOP MENU

start the measurement immediately.

POP-UP/MENU

ON
SCREEN

OPTION

ENTER

RETURN

DISPLAY

Cursor keys
ENTER
RETURN

To check the measurement results, select “Result”. For details, see “Checking
the measurement results” (p.47).

To cancel the measurement temporarily, press RETURN.

The following screen appears on the TV when the measurement at
the first position finishes.

BAND
MODE

TUNING

X

X

4

PRESET

Use the cursor keys to select “Save/Cancel” and press
ENTER.

SUR. DECODE STRAIGHT
MOVIE

MUSIC

INFO

SLEEP

1

2

5

6

7

8

9

0

MEMORY

ENT

ENHANCER PURE DIRECT

3

5

4

To save the measurement result, use the cursor keys to
select “SAVE” and press ENTER.

2

Move the YPAO microphone to the next listening position
and press ENTER.
Repeat step 2 until measurements at all listening positions (up to
8) have been taken.

The adjusted speaker settings are applied.

X
To finish the measurement without saving the result, select “CANCEL”.

En

46

6

Use the cursor keys (e/r) to select “YES” or “NO” to
enable/disable YPAO Volume and press ENTER.

AV

1

2

3

4

5

6

7

V-AUX

Checking the measurement results
You can check the YPAO measurement results.

1

“Result” and press ENTER.

AUDIO

1

2

3

PHONO

TUNER

BLUETOOTH

USB

NET

PARTY

HDMI OUT

After the measurement, use the cursor keys to select

X
You can also select “Result” from “Auto Setup” (p.120) in the “Setup” menu,

MAIN

ZONE 2

which displays the previous measurement results.

The following screen appears.

SCENE

1

2

3

4

X
PROGRAM

MUTE

• If YPAO Volume is enabled, the high- and low-frequency levels are

VOLUME

automatically adjusted according to the volume so that you can enjoy natural
TOP MENU

a

sounds even at low volume.

POP-UP/MENU

ON
SCREEN

b

• You can also enable/disable YPAO Volume in “YPAO Volume” (p.107) in the

OPTION

“Option” menu.
ENTER

RETURN

DISPLAY

Cursor keys
ENTER
RETURN

7

c

Disconnect the YPAO microphone from the unit.
a Measurement result items

BAND

This completes optimization of the speaker settings.

MODE

TUNING

PRESET

b Measurement result details

SUR. DECODE STRAIGHT
MOVIE

MUSIC
ENHANCER PURE DIRECT

INFO

SLEEP

1

2

3

5

6

7

8

9

0

MEMORY

ENT

4

Caution
The YPAO microphone is sensitive to heat, so should not be placed anywhere
where it could be exposed to direct sunlight or high temperatures (such as on
top of AV equipment).

c The number of measured positions (when multi measure is
performed)

2

Use the cursor keys to select an item.
Polarity of each speaker
Wiring

Reverse: The speaker cable may be connected with the
reverse polarity (+/-).
Size of each speaker (cross-over frequency of the
subwoofer)

Size

Large: The speaker can reproduce low-frequency signals
effectively.
Small: The speaker cannot reproduce low-frequency
signals effectively.

3

Distance

Distance from the listening position to each speaker

Level

Output level adjustment for each speaker

To finish checking the results and return to the previous
screen, press RETURN.

En

47

Reloading the previous YPAO adjustments
When the speaker settings you have configured manually are not
suitable, follow the procedure below to discard the manual settings and

AV

1

2

3

4

5

6

7

V-AUX

reload the previous YPAO adjustments.

AUDIO

1

2

3

PHONO

TUNER

BLUETOOTH

USB

NET

PARTY

HDMI OUT

MAIN

ZONE 2

1

and then “Result” (p.119).

2

SCENE

1

2

PROGRAM

3

MUTE

TOP MENU

In the “Setup” menu, select “Speaker”, “Auto Setup”,

4

Use the cursor keys to select “Setup Reload” and press
ENTER.

VOLUME

POP-UP/MENU

ON
SCREEN

ON SCREEN

OPTION

Cursor keys
ENTER

ENTER

RETURN

DISPLAY
BAND

MODE

TUNING

PRESET

SUR. DECODE STRAIGHT
MOVIE

MUSIC

3

To exit from the menu, press ON SCREEN.

ENHANCER PURE DIRECT
INFO

SLEEP

1

2

3

5

6

7

8

9

0

MEMORY

ENT

4

En

48

Error messages
If any error message is displayed during the measurement, resolve the problem and perform YPAO again.

Error message

Cause

Remedy

E-1: No Front SP

Front speakers are not detected.

E-2: No Sur. SP

One of the surround speakers cannot be detected.

E-3: No F.PRNS SP

One of the front presence speakers cannot be detected.

E-4: SBR → SBL

A surround back speaker is connected to the R side only.

When using only one surround back speaker, you need to connect it to the SINGLE jack (L side). Follow the on-screen
instructions to exit YPAO, turn off the unit, and then reconnect the speaker.

E-5: Noisy

The noise is too loud.

Keep the room quiet and follow the on-screen instructions to start the measurement again. If you select “PROCEED”,
YPAO takes the measurement again and ignores any noise detected.

E-6: Check Sur.

Surround back speakers are connected, but no surround speakers
are connected.

Surround speakers need to be connected in order to use surround back speakers. Follow the on-screen instructions
to exit YPAO, turn off the unit, and then reconnect the speakers.

E-7: No MIC

The YPAO microphone has been removed.

Connect the YPAO microphone to the YPAO MIC jack firmly and follow the on-screen instructions to start the
measurement again.

E-8: No Signal

The YPAO microphone cannot detect test tones.

Connect the YPAO microphone to the YPAO MIC jack firmly and follow the on-screen instructions to start the
measurement again. If this error occurs repeatedly, contact the nearest authorized Yamaha dealer or service center.

E-9: User Cancel

The measurement has been canceled.

Follow the on-screen instructions to start the measurement again. To cancel the measurement, select “EXIT”.

E-10: Internal Error

An internal error has occurred.

Follow the on-screen instructions to exit YPAO, turn off and on the unit. If this error occurs repeatedly, contact the
nearest authorized Yamaha dealer or service center.

Follow the on-screen instructions to exit YPAO, turn off the unit, and then check the speaker connections.

En

49

Warning messages
If a warning message is displayed after the measurement, you can still save the measurement results by following on-screen instructions.
However, we recommend you perform YPAO again in order to use the unit with the optimal speaker settings.

Warning message

Cause

Remedy
Select “Wiring” in “Result” (p.47) and check the cable connections (+/-) of the speaker identified by “Reverse”.
If the speaker is connected incorrectly:

W-1: Out of Phase

A speaker cable may be connected with the reverse polarity (+/-).

Turn off the unit and then reconnect the speaker cable.
If the speaker is connected correctly:
Depending on the type of speakers or room environment, this message may appear even if the speakers are
connected correctly. In this case, you can ignore the message.

W-2: Over Distance

A speaker is placed more than 24 m (80 ft) from the listening
position.

Select “Distance” in “Result” (p.47) and move the speaker identified by “>24.00m (>80.0ft)” within 24 m (80 ft) of the
listening position.

W-3: Level Error

There are significant volume differences between the speakers.

Select “Level” in “Result” (p.47) and check the speaker identified by “Over ±10.0dB”, then check the usage
environment and cable connections (+/-) of each speaker, and the volume of the subwoofer. We recommend using
the same speakers or speakers with specifications that are as similar as possible.

En

50

10 Connecting to a network device wirelessly
■ Connecting without a wireless router (access point)

Connect the unit to a wireless router (access point) or a mobile device by establishing a
wireless connection.

Connect a mobile device to the unit directly.
You can use the application for smartphone / tablet “AV CONTROLLER” (p.9) to control the unit

Selecting the connection method

from mobiles devices or enjoy music files stored on mobiles devices on the unit.

Select a connection method according to your network environment.

■ Connecting with a wireless router (access point)
Connect the unit to a wireless router (access point).
You can enjoy Internet radio, AirPlay, or music files stored on media servers (PC/NAS) on the

Mobile device
(such as iPhone)

unit.

The unit

For details on connection, see “Connecting a mobile device to the unit directly (Wireless

Internet

Direct)” (p.57).
Wireless router

Y
• You cannot use Wireless Direct simultaneously with the wired (network cable) connection (p.39) or the wireless
network connection (p.52).

Modem

• When Wireless Direct is enabled, the both the unit and mobile device cannot be connected to the Internet. In
this case, you cannot use the Internet services such as Internet radio. To use the Internet services, terminate
the Wireless Direct connection on the mobile device.

Mobile device
(such as iPhone)
The unit

For details on connection, see “Connecting the unit to a wireless network” (p.52).

Y
You cannot use the wireless network connection simultaneously with Wireless Direct (p.57).

En

51

Connecting the unit to a wireless network
There are several methods to connect the unit to a wireless network.
z
AV

1

5

2

3

4

6

7

V-AUX

• Using MusicCast CONTROLLER (p.59)

AUDIO

1

2

3

PHONO

TUNER

BLUETOOTH

USB

NET

PARTY

HDMI OUT

Select a connection method according to your environment.

• Sharing the iOS device setting (p.52)

ZONE 2

2

Use the cursor keys (e/r) to select “Network”.
Use the cursor keys (q/w) to select “Network
Connection” and press ENTER.

7

Use the cursor keys (q/w) and ENTER to check “Wireless
(Wi-Fi)” and select “OK”.

SCENE

1

Use the cursor keys to select “Setup” and press ENTER.

• Using the WPS push button configuration (p.53)
• Using other connection methods (p.54)

MAIN

4
5
6

3

■ Sharing the iOS device setting

4

You can easily set up a wireless connection by applying the connection
PROGRAM

MUTE

TOP MENU

VOLUME

POP-UP/MENU

ON
SCREEN

settings on iOS devices (iPhone/iPad/iPod touch).
ON SCREEN

wireless router.

OPTION

Cursor keys
ENTER

ENTER

RETURN

DISPLAY

Before proceeding, confirm that your iOS device is connected to a

Y
If you set up a wireless connection with this method, the following settings will be
initialized.

X

BAND

– Network settings

MODE

TUNING

The checkmark indicates the current setting.

PRESET

– Bluetooth settings
SUR. DECODE STRAIGHT
MOVIE

MUSIC

INFO

SLEEP

1

2

5

6

9

0

– USB and network items registered as shortcuts

8

ENHANCER PURE DIRECT

– Internet radio stations register to “Favorites”
4

– Account information for the network services

7

8

MEMORY

ENT

X

3

• You need iOS device with iOS 7 or later. (The following procedure is a setup example
for iOS 8.)
• This configuration does not work if the security method of your wireless router
(access point) is WEP. In this case, use other connection method.

1
2

Press z (receiver power) to turn on the unit.
Turn on the TV and switch the TV input to display video
from the unit (HDMI OUT jack).

Y
Operations with TV screen are available only when your TV is connected to the
unit via HDMI.

3

Use the cursor keys (q/w) and ENTER to check “Share
Wi-Fi Settings (iOS)” and select “NEXT”.

Press ON SCREEN.
En

52

9

After checking the on-screen message, use the cursor
keys (e/r) and ENTER to select “NEXT”.

z
AV

■ Using the WPS push button configuration
You can easily set up a wireless connection with one push of the WPS
button.

Y

1

2

3

4

5

6

7

V-AUX

This configuration does not work if the security method of your wireless router (access
point) is WEP. In this case, use other connection method.

AUDIO

1

2

3

PHONO

TUNER

BLUETOOTH

USB

NET

PARTY

HDMI OUT

MAIN

ZONE 2

1
2

SCENE

1

2

PROGRAM

3

MUTE

4

10 On the iOS device, select the unit as the AirPlay speaker in

VOLUME

the Wi-Fi screen.
TOP MENU

OPTION

RETURN

3

Push the WPS button on the wireless router (access

the front display.
If “Not connected” appears, repeat from Step 1 or try another

DISPLAY

connection method.

BAND
MODE

TUNING

“Press WPS button on Access Point” appears on the front display.

When the connection process finishes, “Completed” appears on
Cursor keys
ENTER

ENTER

Hold down INFO (WPS) on the front panel for 3 seconds.

point).

POP-UP/MENU

ON
SCREEN

Press z (receiver power) to turn on the unit.

PRESET

SUR. DECODE STRAIGHT
MOVIE

MUSIC

INFO

SLEEP

1

2

5

6

7

8

9

0

MEMORY

ENT

ENHANCER PURE DIRECT

3

4

The name of the unit

11 Check the network currently selected and tap “Next”.
Tap here to start setup

The network currently selected

When the sharing process finishes, the unit is automatically connected to
the selected network (access point).

En

53

About WPS
WPS (Wi-Fi Protected Setup) is a standard established by the Wi-Fi Alliance,
which allows easy establishment of a wireless home network.

■ Using other connection methods
If your wireless router (access point) does not support WPS push button
z

5

2

3

6

4

7

V-AUX

1

2

3

PHONO

TUNER

BLUETOOTH

USB

NET

PARTY

HDMI OUT

1
2

AUDIO

MAIN

ZONE 2

2

3

Press z (receiver power) to turn on the unit.
Turn on the TV and switch the TV input to display video

Y

4

Operations with TV screen are available only when your TV is connected to the
PROGRAM

MUTE

TOP MENU

POP-UP/MENU

Cursor keys
ENTER

RETURN

DISPLAY
BAND

MODE

TUNING

PRESET

SUR. DECODE STRAIGHT
MOVIE

ON SCREEN

OPTION

ENTER

MUSIC

3
4
5
6

SLEEP

1

2

5

6

7

8

9

0

MEMORY

ENT

3

4

WPS Button

You can set up a wireless connection with the WPS button
while viewing the TV screen. Follow the instructions
displayed on the TV screen.

Use the cursor keys to select “Setup” and press ENTER.

Share Wi-Fi
Settings (iOS)

See “Sharing the iOS device setting” (p.52).

Use the cursor keys (e/r) to select “Network”.

Access Point Scan

You can set up a wireless connection by searching for an
access point. For details on settings, see “Searching for an
access point” (p.55).

Press ON SCREEN.

Use the cursor keys (q/w) to select “Network
Connection” and press ENTER.

ENHANCER PURE DIRECT
INFO

The following connection methods are available.

unit via HDMI.

VOLUME

ON
SCREEN

desired connection method and select “NEXT”.

from the unit (HDMI OUT jack).

SCENE

1

Use the cursor keys (q/w) and ENTER to select the

wireless network settings.

AV

1

configuration method, follow the procedure below to configure the

8

7

Manual Setting

Use the cursor keys (q/w) and ENTER to check “Wireless
(Wi-Fi)” and select “OK”.
PIN Code

X
The checkmark indicates the current setting.

En

54

You can set up a wireless connection by entering the
required information (such as SSID) manually.
For details on settings, see “Setting up the wireless
connection manually” (p.55).
You can set up a wireless connection by entering the unit’s
PIN code into the wireless router (access point). The
method is available if the wireless router (access point)
supports the WPS PIN code method. For details on settings,
see “Using the PIN code” (p.56).

Searching for an access point

AV

1

2

3

4

5

6

7

V-AUX

2

3

PHONO

TUNER

BLUETOOTH

USB

NET

If you select “Access Point Scan” as the connection method, the unit

If you select “Manual Setting” as the connection method, the wireless

starts searching for access points. After a while, the list of available

connection setting screen appears on the TV.

access points appears on the TV screen.

You need to setup the SSID (network name), encryption method and

1

AUDIO

1

Setting up the wireless connection manually

security key for your network.

Use the cursor keys and ENTER to check the desired

1

access point and select “NEXT”.
The wireless connection setting screen appears on the TV.

MAIN

PARTY

ZONE 2

HDMI OUT

2

SCENE

1

2

3

Use the cursor keys and ENTER to enter the SSID of the
access point and select “NEXT”.

4

Use the cursor keys and ENTER to enter the security key
and select “NEXT”.

PROGRAM

MUTE

TOP MENU

VOLUME

POP-UP/MENU

ON
SCREEN

ON SCREEN

OPTION

Cursor keys
ENTER

ENTER

RETURN

2

DISPLAY

TUNING

Use the cursor keys (q/w) and ENTER to check the
security method of the access point and select “NEXT”.

BAND
MODE

PRESET

SUR. DECODE STRAIGHT
MOVIE

MUSIC

INFO

SLEEP

1

2

3

4

5

6

7

8

9

0

MEMORY

ENT

ENHANCER PURE DIRECT

3

Use the cursor keys (e/r) to select “CONNECT” and
press ENTER to start the connection process.
When the connection process finishes, “Completed” appears on
the TV screen.
If “Not connected” appears, repeat from Step 1 or try another
connection method.

4

To exit from the menu, press ON SCREEN.

En

55

Settings
None, WEP, WPA2-PSK (AES), Mixed Mode

3

Use the cursor keys and ENTER to enter the security key

If you select “PIN Code” as the connection method, the list of available

and select “NEXT”.

5

access points appears on the TV screen.

If you select “None” in Step 2, this setting is not available. Proceed

AV

1

Using the PIN code

2

3

4

6

7

V-AUX

to Step 4.
If you select “WEP”, enter either 5 or 13 character string, or 10 or 26

AUDIO

1

2

3

PHONO

TUNER

BLUETOOTH

USB

NET

1

Use the cursor keys and ENTER to check the desired
access point and select “NEXT”.

hexadecimal digits.

The PIN code of the unit appears on the TV screen.

If you select other method, enter either 8 to 63 character string, or
MAIN

PARTY

ZONE 2

2

64 hexadecimal digits.

HDMI OUT

SCENE

1

2

3

Enter the unit’s PIN code into the wireless router (access
point).

4

For details on settings, refer to the instruction manual of the
PROGRAM

MUTE

TOP MENU

wireless router (access point).

VOLUME

POP-UP/MENU

ON
SCREEN

3

ON SCREEN

OPTION

press ENTER to start the connection process.
Cursor keys
ENTER

ENTER

RETURN

DISPLAY
BAND

MODE

TUNING

Use the cursor keys (e/r) to select “CONNECT” and
When the connection process finishes, “Completed” appears on

4

the TV screen.

Use the cursor keys (e/r) to select “CONNECT” and

If “Not connected” appears, repeat from Step 1 or try another

press ENTER to start the connection process.

PRESET

connection method.

SUR. DECODE STRAIGHT
MOVIE

MUSIC

INFO

SLEEP

1

2

5

6

7

8

9

0

MEMORY

ENT

When the connection process finishes, “Completed” appears on

ENHANCER PURE DIRECT

the TV screen.
3

4

If “Not connected” appears, check that all the information is
entered correctly, and repeat from Step 1.

5

To exit from the menu, press ON SCREEN.

En

56

4

To exit from the menu, press ON SCREEN.

Connecting a mobile device to the unit
directly (Wireless Direct)
z
AV

1

5

2

3

4

6

7

V-AUX

1

2

3

PHONO

BLUETOOTH

USB

NET

PARTY

HDMI OUT

Use the cursor keys (q/w) and ENTER to check “Wireless
Direct” and select “OK”.

Follow the procedure below to connect a mobile device to the unit
directly.

AUDIO

TUNER

7

Y
Wireless Direct connection may be insecure since the communication is not strongly
encrypted. The unit may operate by playback operation on wireless devices connected

MAIN

ZONE 2

to the unit without permission.

SCENE

1

2

PROGRAM

3

MUTE

TOP MENU

1
2

4

VOLUME

POP-UP/MENU

ON
SCREEN

The checkmark indicates the current setting.

8

Y

Use the cursor keys (q/w) and ENTER to check the
desired security method and select “NEXT”.

Operations with TV screen are available only when your TV is connected to the

Cursor keys
ENTER

RETURN

X

Turn on the TV and switch the TV input to display video
from the unit (HDMI OUT jack).

ON SCREEN

OPTION

ENTER

Press z (receiver power) to turn on the unit.

unit via HDMI.

DISPLAY
BAND

MODE

TUNING

PRESET

SUR. DECODE STRAIGHT
MOVIE

MUSIC

INFO

SLEEP

1

2

3

5

6

7

8

9

0

MEMORY

ENT

ENHANCER PURE DIRECT

4

3
4
5
6

Press ON SCREEN.
Use the cursor keys to select “Setup” and press ENTER.
Use the cursor keys (e/r) to select “Network”.
Use the cursor keys (q/w) to select “Network

Settings
None, WPA2-PSK (AES)

Connection” and press ENTER.

Y
If you select “None”, the connection may be insecure since the communication
is not encrypted.

En

57

9
AV

1

5

2

3

4

6

7

V-AUX

2

3

PHONO

TUNER

BLUETOOTH

USB

NET

PARTY

HDMI OUT

11 Configure the Wi-Fi settings of a mobile device.

and select “NEXT”.

For details on settings of your mobile device, refer to the

If you select “None” in Step 8, this setting is not available. Proceed

instruction manual of the mobile device.

to Step 10.

1

Enable the Wi-Fi function on the mobile device.

2

Select the SSID displayed in Step 10 from the list of available

Otherwise, either 8 to 63 character string, or 64 hexadecimal digits.

AUDIO

1

Use the cursor keys and ENTER to enter the security key

access points.
MAIN

ZONE 2

3

SCENE

1

2

PROGRAM

3

MUTE

TOP MENU

12 To exit from the menu, press ON SCREEN.

VOLUME

POP-UP/MENU

ON
SCREEN

ON SCREEN

10 Use the cursor keys (e/r) to select “OK” and press

OPTION

Cursor keys
ENTER

ENTER

RETURN

DISPLAY

ENTER to save the setting.
The settings made appear on the TV screen.

BAND
MODE

TUNING

PRESET

SUR. DECODE STRAIGHT
MOVIE

MUSIC

INFO

SLEEP

1

2

3

5

6

7

8

9

0

MEMORY

ENT

When you are prompted for a password, enter the security key
displayed in Step 10.

4

ENHANCER PURE DIRECT

4

The SSID and security key information is required for setup of a
mobile device.

En

58

11 Connecting to the MusicCast network
z
AV

1

2

3

4

6

7

V-AUX

MusicCast is a brand new wireless musical solution from Yamaha,
allowing you to share music among all of your rooms with a variety of
devices. You can enjoy music from your smartphone, PC, NAS drive and

5

music streaming service anywhere in your house with one easy-to-use

AUDIO

1

2

3

PHONO

TUNER

BLUETOOTH

USB

NET

MAIN

PARTY

ZONE 2

HDMI OUT

2

3

your mobile device and tap “Setup”.

X

• Seamlessly control all MusicCast compatible devices with the

If you have already connected other MusicCast compatible devices to the
network, tap “Settings” and then “Add New Device”.

4

room and play them back simultaneously.
MUTE

3

• Play back music from music streaming services. (The compatible music
TOP MENU

POP-UP/MENU

Operate the “MusicCast CONTROLLER” application
following the on screen instructions, then hold down
CONNECT on the front panel of the unit for 5 seconds.

VOLUME

ON
SCREEN

Tap the “MusicCast CONTROLLER” application icon on

products, visit the Yamaha website.

• Link a MusicCast compatible device to another device in a different
PROGRAM

Press z (receiver power) to turn on the unit.

application. For more details and a lineup of MusicCast compatible

dedicated application “MusicCast CONTROLLER”.

SCENE

1

1
2

streaming services may differ depending on your region and product.)

OPTION

MusicCast CONTROLLER

ENTER

RETURN

DISPLAY
BAND

CONNECT

MODE

TUNING

PRESET

SUR. DECODE STRAIGHT
MOVIE

MUSIC

INFO

SLEEP

1

2

3

4

5

6

7

8

9

0

MEMORY

ENT

4

ENHANCER PURE DIRECT

following the onscreen instructions to set up the network.

To use the network features on the MusicCast compatible device, you
need the dedicated application “MusicCast CONTROLLER” for the
operation. Search for the free application “MusicCast CONTROLLER” on

Operate the “MusicCast CONTROLLER” application

5

Operate the “MusicCast CONTROLLER” application to
playback.

the App Store or Google Play and install it to your device.

Y
Adding the unit to the MusicCast network
Follow the procedure below to add the unit to the MusicCast network.
You can also configure the unit's wireless settings at once.

Y

• AirPlay and DSD audio cannot be delivered.
• When Pure Direct is enabled, input sources other than the network sources and USB
cannot be delivered.
• If you configure the unit's wireless settings with this method, the signal strength
indicator of the front display lights up when the unit is connecting to a network (even
if a wired connection is used).
• You can interlock the power of MusicCast devices with the power of the unit

• The SSID and security key for your network will be needed.

(MusicCast master). For details, see “MusicCast Link Power Interlock” (p.133) in the

• If your router supports multiple SSID’s (network names), connect the mobile device
to the first access point (“SSID 1”, etc.).

En

59

“Setup” menu.

PLAYBACK
AV

1

2

3

4

5

6

7

V-AUX

Basic playback procedure

AUDIO

1

2

3

PHONO

TUNER

BLUETOOTH

USB

NET

PARTY

HDMI OUT

Input selection keys

1

On-screen input selection

Turn on the external devices (such as a TV or BD/DVD
a Press ON SCREEN.

player) connected to the unit.
MAIN

ZONE 2

b Use the cursor keys to select “Input” and press ENTER.

HDMI OUT
SCENE

1

2

PROGRAM

3

MUTE

4

VOLUME

MUTE

VOLUME

2
3

Use the input selection keys to select an input source.

ENTER.

Start playback on the external device or select a radio
station.

TOP MENU

POP-UP/MENU

ON
SCREEN

ON SCREEN

Selecting an HDMI output jack

Refer to the instruction manual for the external device.

OPTION

For details on the following operations, see the corresponding
Cursor keys
ENTER

ENTER

RETURN

pages.

Press HDMI OUT to select an HDMI OUT jack.
Each time you press the key, the HDMI OUT jack to be used for
signal output changes.

Russia models) (p.69)

MODE

TUNING

1

• Listening to FM/AM radio (except Australia, U.K., Europe and

DISPLAY
BAND

PRESET

• Listening to DAB radio (Australia, U.K., Europe and Russia models

SUR. DECODE STRAIGHT
MOVIE

c Use the cursor keys to select the desired input source and press

MUSIC

INFO

SLEEP

1

2

3

4

5

6

7

8

9

0

MEMORY

ENT

HDMI OUT Sel.
OUT 1+2

only) (p.72)

ENHANCER PURE DIRECT

• Listening to FM radio (Australia, U.K., Europe and Russia models
only) (p.76)

OUT 1+2

• Playing back music via Bluetooth (p.80)

VOL.
SL

L C R
SW
SR
SBR

SBL

Outputs the same signal at both the HDMI OUT 1 and
HDMI OUT 2 jacks.

OUT 1

• Playing back music stored on a USB storage device (p.82)

Output the signals at the selected HDMI OUT jack.
OUT 2

• Playing back music stored on media servers (PCs/NAS) (p.85)

Off

Does not output the signals at the HDMI OUT jacks.

• Listening to Internet radio (p.89)
• Playing back iTunes/iPod music with AirPlay (p.92)

X
• You can also select an HDMI output jack by selecting a scene (p.61).

4

Press VOLUME to adjust the volume.

• When “OUT 1+2” is selected, the unit outputs video signals at the highest resolution

X

supported by both TVs (or projectors) connected to the unit. (For example, if you have

• To mute the audio output, press MUTE. Press MUTE again to unmute.

the unit outputs 720p video signals.)

connected a 1080p TV to the HDMI OUT 1 jack and a 720p TV to the HDMI OUT 2 jack,

• To adjust the treble/bass settings, use the “Option” menu or TONE CONTROL
on the front panel (p.107).

• If the HDMI OUT 2 jack is assigned to Zone2 (p.136), you can turn on/off each zone by
pressing HDMI OUT repeatedly.

En

60

Selecting the input source and favorite settings with one touch (SCENE)
The SCENE function allows you to select the assigned input source, sound program, HDMI output and various settings with just one touch.
You can use up to 12 scenes to register your favorite settings and switch them depending on a playback source.

AV

1

2

3

4

5

6

7

V-AUX

1

AUDIO

1

2

3

PHONO

TUNER

BLUETOOTH

USB

NET

PARTY

HDMI OUT

MAIN

ZONE 2

Press SCENE.
The input source and settings registered to the corresponding scene are selected. The unit turns on automatically when it is in standby mode.

By default, the following settings are registered for each scene.

SCENE

1

2

PROGRAM

3

MUTE

TOP MENU

4

VOLUME

POP-UP/MENU

ON
SCREEN

1

SCENE (SCENE key)

SCENE

HDMI Output

4

Input (p.60)

AV 1

AUDIO 1

NET RADIO

TUNER

Audio Select (p.109)

Auto

Auto

-

-

HDMI Output (p.60)

OUT 1+2

OUT 1+2

OUT 1+2

OUT 1+2

DSP Program (p.63)

Sci-Fi

STRAIGHT

7ch Stereo

7ch Stereo

Input
ON SCREEN

3

2

OPTION

Cursor keys
ENTER

ENTER

RETURN

BAND
MODE

TUNING

Pure Direct Mode (p.128)

Auto

Auto

Auto

Auto

Enhancer (p.68)

Off

On

On

On

Enhancer Hi-Res Mode (p.109)

On

On

On

On

Mode

DISPLAY

PRESET

SUR. DECODE STRAIGHT
MOVIE

MUSIC

INFO

SLEEP

1

2

5

6

7

8

9

0

MEMORY

ENT

ENHANCER PURE DIRECT

X
You can select SCENE 1-4 by pressing SCENE on the remote control. Additionally, you can create 8 scenes (SCENE 5-12) and select those scenes from the “Scene” menu (p.113).

3

4

On-screen scene selection
a Press ON SCREEN.
b Use the cursor keys to select “Scene” and press ENTER.
c Use the cursor keys to select a desired scene and press ENTER.

En

61

Registering a scene

1

AV

1

5

2

3

4

6

7

V-AUX

2

3

PHONO

TUNER

BLUETOOTH

USB

NET

MAIN

PARTY

ZONE 2

2

2

PROGRAM

3

MUTE

VOLUME

In addition to the default scene assignments (Input, HDMI Output and
Mode), you can also include the following setting items as the scene
assignments in “Detail” (p.114) in the “Scene” menu.
Sound

Tone Control, YPAO Volume, Adaptive DRC, Extra Bass

Surround

CINEMA DSP 3D Mode, Dialogue Lift, Dialogue Level,
Subwoofer Trim

Video

Video Mode

X

Volume

Master Volume

• The SCENE link playback function allows you to start playback of an external device

Lipsync

Lipsync, Delay

Speaker Setup

Setting Pattern, PEQ Select

HDMI OUT

4

Hold down the desired SCENE key until “SET Complete”
appears on the front display.

SCENE1
SET Complete

SCENE

1

Set the unit to the condition (such as input source and
sound program) that you want to assign to a scene.

AUDIO

1

Selecting setting items to be included as
scene assignments

SCENE

VOL.
L C R
SL
SW
SR
SBL
SBR

connected to the unit via HDMI. To enable SCENE link playback, specify the device
TOP MENU

POP-UP/MENU

ON
SCREEN

OPTION

type in “Device Control” (p.114) in the “Scene” menu.
• (China, Korea, U.K., Europe and Russia models only)
To control your playback device after selecting a scene with the remote control of the

ENTER

unit, change the external device assigned to the SCENE keys. For details, refer to
RETURN

DISPLAY

MODE

TUNING

PRESET

SUR. DECODE STRAIGHT
MUSIC

INFO

SLEEP

1

2

3

5

6

7

8

9

0

MEMORY

ENT

ENHANCER PURE DIRECT

4

En

When the input source is TUNER, USB or NET, the selected radio station or content is
assigned.

“Supplement for Remote Control” in the supplied CD-ROM.

BAND

MOVIE

X

62

Selecting the sound mode
The unit is equipped with a variety of sound programs and surround
decoders that allow you to enjoy playback sources with your favorite

AV

1

2

3

4

5

6

7

V-AUX

sound mode (such as sound field effect or stereo playback).
2

3

PHONO

TUNER

BLUETOOTH

USB

NET

Selecting a sound program suitable for movies

c Use the cursor keys to select a sound program/surround decoder
and press ENTER.

• Press MOVIE repeatedly.
MAIN

PARTY

ZONE 2

This mode lets you enjoy sound field effects optimized for viewing

HDMI OUT

video sources, such as movies, TV programs, and games (p.64).

SCENE

1

2

3

a Press ON SCREEN.
b Use the cursor keys to select “DSP Program” and press ENTER.

AUDIO

1

On-screen sound program/surround decoder selection

X
• You can also switch the sound programs and surround decoder by pressing

4

PROGRAM.

Selecting a sound program suitable for music or stereo playback
PROGRAM

MUTE

TOP MENU

VOLUME

POP-UP/MENU

ON
SCREEN

PROGRAM

ON SCREEN

OPTION

• Press MUSIC repeatedly.

• You can change the settings of the surround programs and surround decoders in the
“DSP Program” menu (p.116).

This mode lets you enjoy sound field effects optimized for listening

• The sound mode can be applied separately to each input source.

music sources or stereo playback (p.65).

• You can check which speakers are currently outputting sound by looking at the
speaker indicators on the unit’s front panel (p.12) or at the “Audio Signal” screen in

Cursor keys
ENTER

ENTER

RETURN

• Press SUR. DECODE repeatedly.

DISPLAY
BAND

PRESET

SUR. DECODE STRAIGHT
MOVIE

MUSIC

INFO

SLEEP

1

2

3

4

5

6

7

8

9

0

MEMORY

ENT

ENHANCER PURE DIRECT

Precaution for enjoying Dolby Atmos®

This mode lets you enjoy unprocessed multichannel playback from

MODE

TUNING

the “Information” menu (p.140).

Selecting a surround decoder

MOVIE
MUSIC
SUR.DECODE
STRAIGHT
ENHANCER
PURE DIRECT

2-channel sources (p.67).

• Dolby Atmos contents are decoded as Dolby TrueHD or Dolby Digital Plus in
the following situations. (Dolby Atmos PCM format is always decoded as
Dolby Atmos.)
– Neither surround back nor presence speakers are used.

Switching to the straight decode mode

– Headphones are used (2-channel playback).

• Press STRAIGHT.
This mode lets you enjoy unprocessed sounds in original channels

• When the Dolby Atmos decoder is working, virtual surround processing (such
as Virtual CINEMA FRONT) (p.66) does not work.

(p.67).
Switching to the Pure Direct mode

Precaution for enjoying DTS:X™

• Press PURE DIRECT.

• When DTS:X contents are played back, you can adjust the volume of dialogue
sounds in “DTS Dialogue Control” (p.108) in the “Option” menu.

This mode lets you enjoy pure high fidelity sound by reducing the
electrical noise from other circuitry (p.68).
Enabling Compressed Music Enhancer
• Press ENHANCER.
This mode lets you enjoy compressed music with additional depth and
breadth (p.68).

En

63

• When the DTS:X decoder is working, virtual surround processing (such as
Virtual CINEMA FRONT) (p.64) does not work.

■ Sound programs suitable for movies (MOVIE)

Enjoying stereoscopic sound fields (CINEMA DSP HD3)

The following sound programs are optimized for viewing video sources, such as movies, TV
programs, and games.

MOVIE THEATER

The unit is equipped with a variety of sound programs that utilize Yamaha’s original DSP
technology (CINEMA DSP HD3). It allows you to easily create sound fields like actual movie

Standard

This program creates a sound field that emphasizes the surround feeling without
disturbing the original acoustic positioning of multichannel audio. Its design is
based on the concept of the ideal movie theater, in which the audience is
surrounded by beautiful reverberations from the left, right, and rear.

Spectacle

This program delivers the scale and grandeur of spectacular movie productions.
It delivers an expansive sound space to match the cinemascope wide-screen, and
boasts a broad dynamic range, providing everything from small delicate sounds
to powerful loud booms.

Sci-Fi

This program clearly reproduces the finely elaborated sound design of the latest
Sci-Fi and SFX movies. You can enjoy a variety of cinematographically created
virtual spaces reproduced with clear separation between dialogue, sound effects,
and background music.

Adventure

This program is ideal for reproducing the sound design of action and adventure
movies precisely. The sound field restrains reverberations, but puts emphasis on
reproducing a sensation of expansiveness on both sides, powerful space
expanded widely to the left and right. The restrained depth creates a clear and
powerful space, while also maintaining the articulation of the sounds and the
separation of the channels.

Drama

This program features stable reverberations that match a wide range of movie
genres, from serious dramas to musicals and comedies. The reverberations are
modest, but suitably stereophonic. The sound effects and background music are
reproduced with a gentle echo that does not impinge on the articulation of the
dialogue. You’ll never get tired listening for long periods.

Mono Movie

This program reproduces monaural video sources, such as classic movies, in an
atmosphere of a good old movie theater. The program creates a pleasant space
with depth, by adding breadth and the appropriate reverberation to the original
audio.

Enhanced

This program creates a sound field that emphasizes the dynamic sound transition
of 3D object audio. Its design is based on the concept of a movie theater with
multi-top speakers, in which the audience is overwhelmed by the natural and
powerful sound effects.

theaters or concert halls in your room and enjoy natural stereoscopic sound fields.
Sound program category

MUSIC
HD 3

CLASSICAL
Hall in Vienna

VOL.
FPL L C R FPR
SL
SW
SR

“CINEMA DSP !” lights up
Sound program

X
• To use the conventional CINEMA DSP, set “CINEMA DSP 3D Mode” (p.128) in the “Setup” menu to “Off”.
• The unit creates front Virtual Presence Speaker (VPS) using the front, center, and surround speakers to produce
3-dimensional sound fields even when no front presence speakers are connected. However, we recommend
using front presence speakers in order to experience the full effect of the sound fields.
• The unit creates rear Virtual Presence Speaker (VPS) using the front, center, and surround speakers to produce
natural 3-dimensional sound fields when front presence speakers are connected.
• If a multichannel source (6.1 channels or more) is input when no surround back speakers are connected, the
unit creates Virtual Surround Back Speaker (VSBS) using the surround speakers to add a sense of depth to the
rear sound field.
• When VPS or VSBS is working, “VIRTUAL” lights up in the front display.

En

64

■ Sound programs suitable for music/stereo playback
(MUSIC)

ENTERTAINMENT

Sports

This program allows listeners to enjoy the rich vividness of sport broadcasts and
light entertainment programs. In sports broadcasts, the commentators’ voices
are positioned clearly at the center, while the atmosphere inside the stadium is
realistically conveyed by the peripheral delivery of the sounds of the fans in a
suitable space.

Action Game

This program is suitable for action games, such as car racing and fighting games.
The reality of, and emphasis on, various effects makes the player feel like they are
right in the middle of the action, allowing for greater concentration. Use this
program in combination with Compressed Music Enhancer for a more dynamic
and strong sound field.

Roleplaying Game

This program is suitable for role-playing and adventure games. This program adds
depth to the sound field for natural and realistic reproduction of background
music, special effects, and dialogue from a wide variety of scenes. Use this
program in combination with Compressed Music Enhancer for a clearer and more
spatial sound field.

Music Video

This program allows you to enjoy videos of pop, rock, and jazz concerts, as if you
were there yourself. Immerse yourself in the hot concert atmosphere thanks to
the vividness of the singers and solos on stage, a presence sound field that
emphasizes the beat of rhythm instruments, and a surround sound field that
reproduces the space of a big live hall.

Recital/Opera

This program controls the amount of reverberations at an optimum level and
emphasizes the depth and clarity of human voices to offer the reverberations of
an orchestra box in front the listener at the same time as providing the acoustic
positioning and feeling of presence on the stage. The surround sound field is
relatively moderate, but the data for concert hall effects are used to represent the
inherent beauty of music. The listener will not be fatigued even after long hours of
opera entertainment.

En

The following sound programs are optimized for listening to music sources.
You can also select stereo playback.

CLASSICAL

65

Hall in Munich

This program simulates a Munich concert hall with approximately 2,500 seats that
uses stylish wood for the interior finishing. Fine, beautiful reverberations spread
richly, creating a calming atmosphere. The listener’s virtual seat is at the center
left of the arena.

Hall in Vienna

This program simulates a 1,700-seat, middle-sized concert hall with a shoebox
shape that is traditional in Vienna. Pillars and ornate carvings create extremely
complex reverberations from all around the audience, producing a very full, rich
sound.

Hall in Amsterdam

The large, shoe box shaped hall seats about 2,200 around the circle stage.
Reflections are rich and pleasing while the sound travels freely.

Church in Freiburg

Located in the south of Germany, this grand, stone-built church has a pointed
tower at 120 meters in height. Its long and narrow shape and the high ceiling
enable the elongated reverberation time and limited initial reflection time. Thus,
the rich reverberation rather than the sound itself reproduces the atmosphere of
the church.

Church in
Royaumont

This program features the sound field created by the refectory (dining hall) of a
beautiful medieval Gothic monastery located in Royaumont on the outskirts of
Paris.

Chamber

This program creates a relatively wide space with a high ceiling, like an audience
hall in a palace. It offers pleasant reverberations that are suitable for courtly
music and chamber music.

■ Enjoying sound field effects without surround speakers
(Virtual CINEMA DSP)

LIVE/CLUB
Village Vanguard

The Jazz club is on 7th Avenue, New York. This small club with the low ceiling
makes the powerful reflections converge toward the stage located in the center.

Warehouse Loft

The warehouse resembles some lofts in Soho. Sound reflects off the concrete
walls clearly with a lot of energy.

Cellar Club

This program simulates an intimate concert venue with a low ceiling and homey
atmosphere. A realistic, live sound field delivers powerful sounds that make you
feel as if you are sitting in the front row in front of a small stage.

The Roxy Theatre

This program creates the sound field of a 460-seat rock music concert venue in Los
Angeles. The listener’s virtual seat is at the center left of the hall.

The Bottom Line

This program creates the sound field at stage front in The Bottom Line, a famous
New York jazz club once. The floor can seat 300 people to the left and right in a
sound field offering real and vibrant sound.

If you select one of the sound programs (except 2ch Stereo and 7ch Stereo) when no surround
speakers are connected, the unit utilizes Yamaha’s original virtual surround technology to
reproduce up to 7-channel surround sound and enable you to enjoy the well-oriented sound
field only with the front-side speakers. We recommend using presence speakers in order to
enjoy more effective stereoscopic sound field.

X
When Virtual CINEMA DSP is working, “VIRTUAL” lights up in the front display.

■ Enjoying surround sound with 5 speakers placed in
front (Virtual CINEMA FRONT)
If you have surround speakers but there is no space to place them in the rear of your room, you

STEREO

can place them in the front (p.20) and enjoy multichannel surround sound using Virtual

2ch Stereo

Use this program to mix down multichannel sources to 2 channels. When
multichannel signals are input, they are down mixed to 2 channels and output
from the front speakers (this program does not utilize CINEMA DSP).

7ch Stereo

Use this program to output sound from all speakers. When you play back
multichannel sources, the unit mixes down the source to 2 channels, and then
outputs the sound from all speakers. This program creates a larger sound field
and is ideal for background music at parties.

CINEMA FRONT.
When “Layout (Surround)” (p.125) in the “Setup” menu is set to “Front”, the unit creates the
virtual surround speakers in the rear side to allow you to enjoy multichannel surround sound
with the 5 speakers placed in the front.

X
When Virtual CINEMA FRONT is working, “VIRTUAL” lights up in the front display.

Y

■ Enjoying surround sound with headphones
(SILENT CINEMA)

CINEMA DSP HD3 (p.64) and Virtual CINEMA DSP (p.66) do not work when “2ch Stereo” or “7ch Stereo” is selected.

You can enjoy surround or sound field effects, like a multichannel speaker system, with stereo
headphones by connecting the headphones to the PHONES jack and selecting a sound
program or a surround decoder.

En

66

Enjoying unprocessed playback

1

Each time you press the key, the surround decoder changes.

You can play back input sources without any sound field effect
processing.

AV

1

2

3

4

5

6

7

V-AUX

1

2

3

PHONO

TUNER

BLUETOOTH

USB

NET

SUR. DECODE
†‡ Dsur

■ Playing back in original channels
(straight decode)

AUDIO

When the straight decode mode is enabled, the unit produces stereo
MAIN

PARTY

ZONE 2

HDMI OUT

2

PROGRAM

3

MUTE

1

VOLUME

Press STRAIGHT.

bDsur

Neural:X

Uses the DTS Neural:X decoder suitable for your
speaker layout. A real acoustic space (including
overhead) will be created especially when
object-based audio (such as DTS:X content) is
played.

Neo:6 Cinema

Uses the DTS Neo:6 decoder (or DTS-ES Matrix
decoder) suitable for movies. Sounds will be output
from the surround/surround back speakers.

Neo:6 Music

Uses the DTS Neo:6 decoder (or DTS-ES Matrix
decoder) suitable for music. Sounds will be output
from the surround/surround back speakers.

or disabled.

POP-UP/MENU

ON
SCREEN

OPTION

STRAIGHT

ENTER

VOL.
SL

L C R
SW
SR
SBR

SBL

RETURN

DISPLAY

Y

BAND
MODE

TUNING

SUR.DECODE

PRESET

speakers are used, select a surround decoder (p.67).

SUR. DECODE STRAIGHT
MOVIE

STRAIGHT

MUSIC
ENHANCER PURE DIRECT

INFO

• To enable 6.1/7.1-channel playback from 5.1-channel sources when surround back

SLEEP

1

2

3

5

6

7

4

8

9

0

MEMORY

ENT

• If “Layout (Surround)” (p.125) in the “Setup” menu is set to “Front”, Virtual CINEMA
FRONT (p.66) works when multichannel source is played back.

■ Playing back in extended multichannel
(surround decoder)
The surround decoder enables unprocessed multichannel playback from
2-channel or multichannel sources.

L C R
SW
SR
SBR

SBL

Uses the Dolby Surround decoder suitable for your
speaker layout. A real acoustic space (including
overhead) will be created especially when
object-based audio (such as Dolby Atmos content) is
played.

Each time you press the key, the straight decode mode is enabled
TOP MENU

SL

Uses the decoder automatically selected by input
source. The DTS Neural:X decoder is selected for DTS
sources and the Dolby Surround decoder is selected
for other sources.

produces unprocessed multichannel sounds for multichannel sources.

4

VOL.

Auto

sound from the front speakers for 2-channel sources such as CDs, and

SCENE

1

Press SUR. DECODE to select a surround decoder.

Y
• When the Dolby Surround decoder is selected, virtual surround processing (such as
Virtual CINEMA FRONT) (p.66) does not work.
• If the Dolby Surround decoder is selected when only one surround back speaker is
used, no sound is output from the surround back speaker (except when a Dolby

X

Atmos content or a DTS:X content is played).

• Speakers that produce sounds will change depending on your speaker system and

• When the Neural:X decoder is selected, virtual surround processing (such as Virtual
CINEMA FRONT) (p.64) does not work.

the selected decode type (p.117).
• For details on each decoder, see “Glossary” (p.159).

En

67

Enjoying pure high fidelity sound
(Pure Direct)
When Pure Direct is enabled, the unit plays back the selected source with

AV

1

5

2

3

4

6

7

V-AUX

the least circuitry in order to reduce the electrical noise from other
circuitry (such as the front display). It allows you to enjoy Hi-Fi sound

AUDIO

1

2

3

PHONO

TUNER

BLUETOOTH

USB

NET

PARTY

HDMI OUT

MAIN

ZONE 2

quality.

1

2

Compressed Music Enhancer adds depth and breadth to the sound,

3

MUTE

TOP MENU

it was compressed. This function can be used along with any other sound

4

PURE DIRECT
PROGRAM

allowing you to enjoy a dynamic sound close to the original sound before

Press PURE DIRECT.
Each time you press the key, Pure Direct is enabled or disabled.

SCENE

1

In addition, Compressed Music Enhancer enhances the quality of
uncompressed digital audio (such as 2-channel PCM and FLAC) when

R

“Hi-Res Mode” (p.109) in the “Option” menu is set to “On” (default).

Y

POP-UP/MENU

When Pure Direct is enabled, the following functions are not available.

OPTION

– Some settings for the speakers or sound programs

ENTER

modes.

VOL.
L

VOLUME

ON
SCREEN

Playing back digitally compressed formats
(such as MP3, etc.) with enriched sound
(Compressed Music Enhancer)

1

Each time you press the key, Compressed Music Enhancer is

– Operating the on-screen menu and “Option” menu
RETURN

TUNING

enabled or disabled.

DISPLAY

– Using the multi-zone function

BAND

– Viewing information on the front display (when not in operation)

MODE

Press ENHANCER.

Enhancer On

PRESET
Hi-Res ENHANCER

SUR. DECODE STRAIGHT
MOVIE

MUSIC

INFO

SLEEP

1

2

5

6

7

8

9

0

MEMORY

ENT

VOL.
SL

L C R
SW
SR
SBR

SBL

ENHANCER PURE DIRECT

“ENHANCER” lights up

PURE DIRECT
3

4

ENHANCER

Y
Compressed Music Enhancer does not work on the following audio sources.
– Signals whose sampling frequency is over 48 kHz
– DSD audio

X
You can also use “Enhancer” (p.109) in the “Option” menu to enable/disable
Compressed Music Enhancer.

En

68

Listening to FM/AM radio (except Australia, U.K., Europe and Russia models)
You can tune into a radio station by specifying its frequency or selecting
1

2

3

6

4

7

V-AUX

Y

1

2

3

PHONO

• The radio frequencies differ depending on the country or region where the unit is

TUNER

BLUETOOTH

USB

NET

5

AUDIO

TUNER

being used. The explanation of this section uses a display with frequencies used in
U.S.A. model.

MAIN

PARTY

ZONE 2

2

MUTE

Press BAND to select a band (FM or AM).

FM 87.50MHz

3

VOLUME

about a second to search stations automatically.

for AM. Depending on your country or region, set the frequency steps to

OPTION

Numeric keys: Enter a frequency directly. For example, to select

100 kHz for FM and 10 kHz for AM.

ENTER

RETURN

DISPLAY
BAND

BAND

MODE

TUNING

PRESET

TUNING
SUR. DECODE STRAIGHT
MOVIE

MUSIC

INFO

SLEEP

1

2

5

6

7

8

9

0

MEMORY

ENT

1
2

3

98.50 MHz, press “9”, “8”, “5” and “0” (or ENT).

Set the unit to standby mode.

FM 98.50MHz

SL

L C R
SW
SR
SBR

SBL

When holding down STRAIGHT on the front panel, press
MAIN ZONE z

4

VOL.

STEREO TUNED

“TUNED” lights up when a signal is received from a radio station.

MAIN ZONE z.

ENHANCER PURE DIRECT

Use the following keys to set a frequency.
TUNING: Increase/decrease the frequency. Hold down the key for

At the factory, the frequency step setting is set to 50 kHz for FM and 9 kHz

POP-UP/MENU

ON
SCREEN

VOL.

4

(Brazil, Asia and General models only)
TOP MENU

Press TUNER to select “TUNER” as the input source.

antennas.

3

Setting the frequency steps
PROGRAM

1
2

• If you cannot obtain good reception on the radio, adjust the direction of the FM/AM

HDMI OUT

SCENE

1

Selecting a frequency for reception

from registered radio stations.

AV

“STEREO” also lights up when a stereo signal is received.

STRAIGHT

Y

Numeric keys

“Wrong Station!” appears when you enter a frequency that is out of reception range.

X
You can switch between “Stereo” (stereo) and “Mono” (monaural) for FM radio
reception in “FM Mode” (p.110) in the “Option” menu. When the signal reception for an

PROGRAM

3

FM radio station is unstable, switching to monaural may improve it.

Press PROGRAM repeatedly to select “TUNER FRQ STEP”.

TUNER FRQ STEP
FM50/AM9

4
5

Press STRAIGHT to select “FM100/AM10”.
Press MAIN ZONE z to set the unit to standby mode and
turn it on again.
En

69

Registering favorite radio stations
(presets)
You can register up to 40 radio stations as presets. Once you have

AV

1

2

5

3

6

4

7

V-AUX

1

2

3

PHONO

TUNER

BLUETOOTH

USB

NET

PARTY

HDMI OUT

registered stations, you can easily tune into them by selecting their
preset numbers.

AUDIO

MAIN

ZONE 2

TUNER

■ Selecting a preset station
Tune into a registered radio station by selecting its preset number.

1
2

Press TUNER to select “TUNER” as the input source.
Press PRESET repeatedly to select the desired radio

X

station.

You can automatically register FM radio stations that have strong signals by using

You can also enter a preset number (01 to 40) directly by using the

“Auto Preset” (p.79).

numeric keys after pressing PRESET once.

SCENE

1

2

3

Preset

4

■ Registering a radio station

01:FM 98.50MHz

VOL.

STEREO TUNED

SL

PROGRAM

MUTE

TOP MENU

1

POP-UP/MENU

ON
SCREEN

OPTION

Y
Follow “Selecting a frequency for reception” (p.69) to

• “No Presets” appears when no radio stations are registered.

tune into the desired radio station.

• “Wrong Num.” appears when an invalid number is entered.
• “Empty” appears when a preset number not in use is entered.

ENTER

RETURN

2

DISPLAY
BAND

MODE

TUNING

PRESET

PRESET
SUR. DECODE STRAIGHT
MOVIE

MUSIC

INFO

SLEEP

1

2

3

4

5

6

7

8

9

0

MEMORY

ENT

Hold down MEMORY for seconds.

X

The first time that you do register a station, the selected radio

To clear preset stations, use “Clear Preset” or “Clear All Preset” (p.79).

station will be registered to the preset number “01”. Thereafter,
each radio station you select will be registered to the next empty

ENHANCER PURE DIRECT

L C R
SW
SR
SBR

SBL

Select a radio station manually and register it to a preset number.

VOLUME

(unused) preset number after the most recently registered
number.
Numeric keys
MEMORY

Preset number

Preset
STEREO TUNED

01:FM 98.50MHz
Preset OK

VOL.
SL

L C R
SW
SR
SBR

SBL

X
To select a preset number for registering, press MEMORY once after tuning into
the desired radio station, press PRESET to select a preset number, and then
press MEMORY again.

“Empty” (not in use) or the frequency currently registered

Preset
STEREO TUNED

01:Empty
FM 98.50MHz

VOL.
SL

L C R
SW
SR
SBR

SBL

En

70

Operating the radio on the TV

■ Browse screen

You can view the radio information or select a radio station on the TV.
AV

1

5

2

3

4

6

7

V-AUX

1

a

Press TUNER to select “TUNER” as the input source.

c

The playback screen is displayed on the TV.

AUDIO

1

2

3

PHONO

TUNER

BLUETOOTH

USB

NET

PARTY

HDMI OUT

TUNER

b

■ Playback screen
MAIN

ZONE 2

SCENE

1

2

PROGRAM

3

MUTE

b

a

4

a Preset station list
Displays the list of preset stations. Use the cursor key (q/w) to select a preset
station and press ENTER to tune into it.

c

VOLUME

b Preset number
c Operation menu

TOP MENU

POP-UP/MENU

ON
SCREEN

Press the cursor key (r) and then use the cursor key (q/w) to select an item.
Press ENTER to confirm the selection.

OPTION

ENTER

RETURN

DISPLAY
BAND

Menu operation keys
Cursor keys
ENTER
RETURN

To close the submenu, press RETURN.

a Radio station information
Displays the information of the selected radio station such as the selected band
(FM/AM) and frequency.

Menu

MODE

TUNING

b TUNED/STEREO indicators

PRESET

SUR. DECODE STRAIGHT
MOVIE

MUSIC

INFO

SLEEP

1

2

3

4

5

6

7

8

9

0

MEMORY

ENT

ENHANCER PURE DIRECT

Submenu
Memory
Auto Preset

Automatically registers FM radio stations
with strong signals (up to 40 stations).

Clear Preset

Clear the preset station selected in the
list.

Clear All Preset

Clear all the preset stations.

“TUNED” lights up when a signal is received from a radio station.
“STEREO” lights up when a stereo signal is received.

Utility

c Operation menu
Press the cursor key (r) and then use the cursor key (q/w) to select an item.
Press ENTER to confirm the selection.
Menu

1 Page Up

Function

Function
Registers the current station to the preset
number selected in the list.

Moves to the previous/next page of the
list.

Browse

Moves to the browse screen (preset station list).

1 Page Down

Screen Off

Closes the screen display and shows the background.
Press one of the Menu operation keys to redisplay it.

Now Playing

Moves to the playback screen.

Screen Off

Closes the screen display and shows the
background. Press one of the Menu
operation keys to redisplay it.

En

71

Listening to DAB radio (Australia, U.K.,
Europe and Russia models only)
AV

1

5

2

3

6

7

V-AUX

2

3

PHONO

TUNER

BLUETOOTH

USB

NET

first DAB radio station as stored in station order.
DAB

X
• If no DAB radio stations are found by an initial scan, the message in Step 1

using MPEG-4 audio codec (AAC+), which has a more efficient

appears again. Press ENTER to start an initial scan again.

transmission method.
PARTY

ZONE 2

1

2

• You can check reception strength of each DAB channel label (p.74).

HDMI OUT

Y

SCENE

3

• To perform an initial scan again after some DAB radio stations are stored,
select “Init Scan” (p.106) in the “Option” menu. If you perform an initial scan

• The unit supports Band III (174 to 240 MHz) only.

4

again, the DAB radio stations currently registered to the preset numbers will

• Be sure to check the DAB coverage in your area in that not all areas are currently being
PROGRAM

MUTE

be cleared.

covered. For a list of nationwide DAB statuses and worldwide DAB frequencies, check

VOLUME

L C R
SW
SR
SBR

SBL

receive DAB+ (an upgraded version of DAB) that allows for more stations
TUNER

VOL.
SL

and more stable reception compared to analog signals. The unit can also

AUDIO

MAIN

BBC Radio 4

DAB (Digital Audio Broadcasting) uses digital signals for clearer sound

4

1

When the initial scan finishes, the unit automatically tunes into the

WorldDMB online at http://www.worlddab.org/.
TOP MENU

X

POP-UP/MENU

ON
SCREEN

OPTION

Selecting a DAB radio station for reception

For details on the antenna connection, see “Connecting the radio antennas” (p.38).

You can select a DAB radio station from the stations stored by the initial

ENTER

ENTER

RETURN

scan.

Preparing the DAB tuning

DISPLAY
BAND

BAND

MODE

TUNING

PRESET

TUNING
SUR. DECODE STRAIGHT
MOVIE

MUSIC

INFO

SLEEP

1

2

3

4

5

6

7

8

9

0

MEMORY

ENT

Before tuning into DAB radio stations, follow the procedure below to
perform an initial scan.

ENHANCER PURE DIRECT

1
2

Press TUNER to select “TUNER” as the input source.
Press BAND to select the DAB band.

1
2
3

Press TUNER to select “TUNER” as the input source.
Press BAND to select the DAB band.
Press TUNING repeatedly to select a DAB radio station.
DAB

The following message appears on the front panel if you have not
performed an initial scan yet.

Init Scan
Press [ENTER]

3

VOL.
SL

L C R
SW
SR
SBR

SBL

Y
• “Off Air” appears when the selected DAB radio station is currently not
VOL.

available.
• When the unit is receiving a secondary station, “2” appears next to “DAB”.

Secondary station

Press ENTER to start an initial scan.

Init Scan
>>>------- 30%

BBC Radio 4
Daily Service

DAB 2
VOL.

BBC National

VOL.
SL

L C R
SW
SR
SBR

SBL

X
You can watch videos input from external devices while listening to radio by
selecting the video input jack in “Video Out” (p.110) in the “Option” menu.

En

72

Registering favorite DAB radio stations
(presets)
You can register up to 40 DAB radio stations as presets. Once you have

AV

1

2

5

3

6

4

7

V-AUX

1

2

3

PHONO

TUNER

BLUETOOTH

USB

NET

PARTY

HDMI OUT

registered stations, you can easily tune into them by selecting their
preset numbers.

AUDIO

TUNER

X
You can register up to 40 favorite radio stations each for DAB and FM bands.

MAIN

ZONE 2

2

3

■ Registering a DAB radio station as presets

4

Select a DAB radio station and register it to a preset number.
PROGRAM

MUTE

POP-UP/MENU

ON
SCREEN

Press TUNER to select “TUNER” as the input source.
Press BAND to select the DAB band.
Press PRESET repeatedly to select the desired DAB radio
You can also enter a preset number (01 to 40) directly by using the
numeric keys after pressing PRESET once.

PRESET:01

Follow “Selecting a DAB radio station for reception”

OPTION

2

RETURN

TUNING

X

(unused) preset number after the most recently registered

To clear preset stations, use “Clear Preset” or “Clear All Preset” (p.71).

number.

2

3

5

6

7

8

9

0

MEMORY

ENT

• “Empty” appears when a preset number not in use is entered.

each radio station you select will be registered to the next empty

ENHANCER PURE DIRECT

1

• “Wrong Num.” appears when an invalid number is entered.

PRESET
SUR. DECODE STRAIGHT
MUSIC

SLEEP

Y

station will be registered to the preset number “01”. Thereafter,

PRESET

INFO

L C R
SW
SR
SBR

BAND

BAND
MODE

SL

• “No Presets” appears when no DAB radio stations are registered.

Hold down MEMORY for seconds.
The first time that you do register a station, the selected radio

DISPLAY

VOL.

SBL

(p.72) to tune into the desired DAB radio station.

ENTER

MOVIE

1
2
3

VOLUME

1
TOP MENU

Tune into a registered DAB radio station by selecting its preset number.

station.

SCENE

1

■ Selecting a preset DAB radio station

4

Preset number
MEMORY

Preset

01:BBC Radio 4
Preset OK

VOL.
SL

L C R
SW
SR
SBR

SBL

X
To select a preset number for registering, press MEMORY once after tuning into
the desired DAB radio station, press PRESET to select a preset number, and then
press MEMORY again.

“Empty” (not in use) or “Overwrite?” (in use)

Preset

02:Empty
BBC Radio 4

VOL.
SL

L C R
SW
SR
SBR

SBL

En

73

Displaying the DAB information
The unit can receive various types of DAB information when it is tuned
into a DAB radio station.

AV

1

5

2

3

4

6

7

V-AUX

AUDIO

1

2

3

PHONO

TUNER

BLUETOOTH

USB

NET

PARTY

HDMI OUT

MAIN

ZONE 2

TUNER

1
2

1

2

PROGRAM

3

MUTE

TOP MENU

Each time you press the key, the displayed item changes.

Info
Program Type

4

RETURN

SL

L C R
SW
SR
SBR

SBL

About 3 seconds later, the corresponding information for the
OPTION
Cursor keys
ENTER

ENTER

VOL.

Item name

POP-UP/MENU

OPTION

100 [best]).

Press INFO.

VOLUME

ON
SCREEN

You can check reception strength of each DAB channel label (0 [none] to

Tune into the desired DAB radio station.

SCENE

displayed item appears.
DAB

DISPLAY

Checking reception strength of each DAB
channel label

Classic FM
Classic Music

1
2
3
4
5

BAND

TUNING

VOL.
SL

Use the cursor keys to select “Tune AID” and press ENTER.
Use the cursor keys (e/r) to select the desired DAB

DAB channel label

SUR. DECODE STRAIGHT
MOVIE

MUSIC

INFO

SLEEP

1

2

5

6

7

8

9

0

MEMORY

ENT

ENHANCER PURE DIRECT

INFO
3

Press OPTION.

Tune AID
12B Level: 80

L C R
SW
SR
SBR

SBL

Information

PRESET

Press BAND to select the DAB band.

channel label.

BAND
MODE

Press TUNER to select “TUNER” as the input source.

4

DLS
(Dynamic Label
Segment)

Information on the current station

Ensemble Label

Ensemble name

Program Type

Station genre

Date And Time

Current date and time

Audio Mode

Audio mode (monaural/stereo) and bit rate

CH Label/Freq.

Channel label and frequency

Signal Quality

Signal reception quality (0 [none] to 100 [best])

DSP Program

Sound mode name

Audio Decoder

Decoder name

X
Some information may not be available depending on the selected DAB radio
station.

En

74

6

VOL.
SL

L C R
SW
SR
SBR

SBL

Reception strength

To exit from the menu, press OPTION.

■ DAB frequency information
The unit supports Band III (174 to 240 MHz) only.
Frequency

Channel label

Frequency

Channel label

174.928 MHz

5A

225.648 MHz

12B

176.640 MHz

5B

227.360 MHz

12C

178.352 MHz

5C

229.072 MHz

12D

180.064 MHz

5D

230.784 MHz

13A

181.936 MHz

6A

232.496 MHz

13B

183.648 MHz

6B

234.208 MHz

13C

185.360 MHz

6C

235.776 MHz

13D

187.072 MHz

6D

237.488 MHz

13E

188.928 MHz

7A

239.200 MHz

13F

190.640 MHz

7B

192.352 MHz

7C

194.064 MHz

7D

195.936 MHz

8A

197.648 MHz

8B

199.360 MHz

8C

201.072 MHz

8D

202.928 MHz

9A

204.640 MHz

9B

206.352 MHz

9C

208.064 MHz

9D

209.936 MHz

10A

211.648 MHz

10B

213.360 MHz

10C

215.072 MHz

10D

216.928 MHz

11A

218.640 MHz

11B

220.352 MHz

11C

222.064 MHz

11D

223.936 MHz

12A

En

75

Listening to FM radio (Australia, U.K., Europe and Russia models only)
You can tune into a radio station by specifying its frequency or selecting
from registered radio stations.

AV

1

5

2

3

6

4

7

V-AUX

1

2

3

PHONO

TUNER

BLUETOOTH

USB

NET

PARTY

HDMI OUT

Y

AUDIO

TUNER

Registering favorite FM radio stations
(presets)

If you cannot obtain good reception on the radio, adjust the direction of the DAB/FM

You can register up to 40 FM radio stations as presets. Once you have

antennas.

registered stations, you can easily tune into them by selecting their
preset numbers.

MAIN

ZONE 2

Selecting a frequency for reception

SCENE

1

2

PROGRAM

3

MUTE

TOP MENU

1
2

VOLUME

POP-UP/MENU

ON
SCREEN

“Auto Preset” (p.79).

Press TUNER to select “TUNER” as the input source.

■ Registering a radio station

Press BAND to select the FM band.

Select a radio station manually and register it to a preset number.

FM 87.50MHz

OPTION

VOL.

1

ENTER

RETURN

BAND

BAND

TUNING

Follow “Selecting a frequency for reception” (p.76) to
tune into the desired radio station.

DISPLAY

MODE

X
You can automatically register FM radio stations that have strong signals by using

4

3

PRESET

Use the following keys to set a frequency.

2

Hold down MEMORY for seconds.

PRESET

TUNING: Increase/decrease the frequency. Hold down the key for

TUNING

about a second to search stations automatically.

The first time that you do register a station, the selected radio

Numeric keys: Enter a frequency directly. For example, to select

station will be registered to the preset number “01”. Thereafter,

98.50 MHz, press “9”, “8”, “5” and “0” (or ENT).

each radio station you select will be registered to the next empty

SUR. DECODE STRAIGHT
MOVIE

MUSIC

INFO

SLEEP

1

2

3

4

5

6

7

8

9

0

MEMORY

ENT

ENHANCER PURE DIRECT

Numeric keys
MEMORY

(unused) preset number after the most recently registered

FM 98.50MHz

number.

VOL.

STEREO TUNED

SL

L C R
SW
SR
SBR

Preset number

SBL

“TUNED” lights up when a signal is received from a radio station.

Preset

“STEREO” also lights up when a stereo signal is received.

Y
“Wrong Station!” appears when you enter a frequency that is out of reception range.

STEREO TUNED

01:FM 98.50MHz
Preset OK

VOL.
SL

L C R
SW
SR
SBR

SBL

X
To select a preset number for registering, press MEMORY once after tuning into

X

the desired radio station, press PRESET to select a preset number, and then

You can switch between “Stereo” (stereo) and “Mono” (monaural) for FM radio
reception in “FM Mode” (p.110) in the “Option” menu. When the signal reception for an

press MEMORY again.

“Empty” (not in use) or the frequency currently registered

FM radio station is unstable, switching to monaural may improve it.

Preset
STEREO TUNED

En

76

01:Empty
FM 98.50MHz

VOL.
SL

L C R
SW
SR
SBR

SBL

■ Selecting a preset station
Tune into a registered radio station by selecting its preset number.
AV

1

5

2

3

6

4

7

V-AUX

1

2

3

PHONO

TUNER

BLUETOOTH

USB

NET

PARTY

HDMI OUT

AUDIO

MAIN

ZONE 2

TUNER

1
2
3

2

3

Press BAND to select the FM band
Press PRESET repeatedly to select the desired radio
station.

SCENE

1

Press TUNER to select “TUNER” as the input source.

You can also enter a preset number (01 to 40) directly by using the

4

numeric keys after pressing PRESET once.
PROGRAM

MUTE

Preset

VOLUME

01:FM 98.50MHz

VOL.

STEREO TUNED

SL

TOP MENU
ON
SCREEN

L C R
SW
SR
SBR

SBL

POP-UP/MENU

Y

OPTION

• “No Presets” appears when no radio stations are registered.

ENTER

• “Wrong Num.” appears when an invalid number is entered.
RETURN

DISPLAY

• “Empty” appears when a preset number not in use is entered.

BAND

BAND

MODE

TUNING

PRESET

PRESET
SUR. DECODE STRAIGHT
MOVIE

X
To clear preset stations, use “Clear Preset” or “Clear All Preset” (p.79).

MUSIC
ENHANCER PURE DIRECT

INFO

SLEEP

1

2

3

5

6

7

8

9

0

MEMORY

ENT

4

Numeric keys

En

77

Radio Data System tuning

Program Service

Program service name

Program Type

Current program type

Radio Text

Information on the current program

Clock Time

Current time

data, such as “Program Service”, “Program Type”, “Radio Text” and

DSP Program

Sound mode name

“Clock Time”, when it is tuned into a Radio Data System broadcasting

Audio Decoder

Decoder name

(U.K., Europe and Russia models only)
Radio Data System is a data transmission system used by FM stations in

AV

1

2

3

4

5

6

7

V-AUX

3

PHONO

many countries. The unit can receive various types of Radio Data System

AUDIO

1

2

TUNER

BLUETOOTH

USB

NET

PARTY

HDMI OUT

station.
MAIN

ZONE 2

■ Displaying the Radio Data System
information

SCENE

1

2

PROGRAM

3

MUTE

TOP MENU

4

1

VOLUME

Tune into the desired Radio Data System broadcasting
station.

POP-UP/MENU

ON
SCREEN

Y

X

OPTION

ENTER

We recommend using “Auto Preset” to tune into the Radio Data System
broadcasting stations (p.79).

RETURN

DISPLAY

2

BAND
MODE

TUNING

PRESET

MOVIE

MUSIC

INFO

SLEEP

1

2

3

4

5

6

7

8

9

0

MEMORY

ENT

Press INFO.
Each time you press the key, the displayed item changes.

SUR. DECODE STRAIGHT

ENHANCER PURE DIRECT

INFO
STEREO TUNED

Info
Program Type

VOL.
SL

L C R
SW
SR
SBR

SBL

Item name

About 3 seconds later, the corresponding information for the
displayed item appears.
Frequency (always displayed)

STEREO TUNED

FM 98.50MHz
CLASSICS

VOL.
SL

L C R
SW
SR
SBR

SBL

Information

En

78

“Program Service”, “Program Type”, “Radio Text”, and “Clock Time” are not
displayed if the radio station does not provide the Radio Data System service.

Operating the radio on the TV

■ Browse screen

You can view the radio information or select a radio station on the TV.
AV

1

5

2

3

4

6

7

V-AUX

1

a

Press TUNER to select “TUNER” as the input source.
c

The playback screen is displayed on the TV.

AUDIO

1

2

3

PHONO

TUNER

BLUETOOTH

USB

NET

PARTY

HDMI OUT

TUNER

b

■ Playback screen
MAIN

ZONE 2

SCENE

1

2

PROGRAM

3

MUTE

b

a

4

Displays the list of preset stations. Use the cursor keys (q/w) to select a preset
station and press ENTER to tune into it.

仮画面

VOLUME

a Preset station list

c

b Preset number
c Operation menu

TOP MENU

POP-UP/MENU

ON
SCREEN

Press the cursor key (r) and then use the cursor keys (q/w) to select an item.
Press ENTER to confirm the selection.

OPTION

ENTER

RETURN

DISPLAY
BAND

Menu operation keys
Cursor keys
ENTER
RETURN

To close the submenu, press RETURN.

a Radio station information
Menu

Displays the information of the selected radio station such as the selected band
(DAB/FM) and frequency.

MODE

TUNING

(U.K., Europe and Russia models only)

PRESET

SUR. DECODE STRAIGHT
MOVIE

MUSIC

INFO

SLEEP

1

2

3

4

5

6

7

8

9

0

MEMORY

ENT

ENHANCER PURE DIRECT

When tuning into a Radio Data System broadcasting station (p.78), the Radio
Data System information (“Program Service”, “Program Type,” “Radio Text”
and “Clock Time”) is also displayed.

Submenu
Memory
Auto Preset

Automatically registers FM radio stations
with strong signals (up to 40 stations).

Clear Preset

Clear the preset station selected in the
list.

Clear All Preset

Clear all the preset stations.

Utility

b TUNED/STEREO indicators

Function
Registers the current station to the preset
number selected in the list.

“TUNED” lights up when a signal is received from a radio station.
“STEREO” lights up when a stereo signal is received.
1 Page Up

c Operation menu
Press the cursor key (r) and then use the cursor keys (q/w) to select an item.
Press ENTER to confirm the selection.
Menu

1 Page Down

Moves to the previous/next page of the
list.

Now Playing

Moves to the playback screen.

Screen Off

Closes the screen display and shows the
background. Press one of the menu
operation keys to redisplay it.

Function

Browse

Moves to the browse screen (preset station list).

Screen Off

Closes the screen display and shows the background.
Press one of the menu operation keys to redisplay it.

Y
(U.K., Europe and Russia models only)
Only Radio Data System broadcasting stations are stored automatically by “Auto
Preset”.

En

79

Playing back music via Bluetooth
You can play back music files stored on a Bluetooth device (such as
smartphones) on the unit. Also, you can enjoy audio played back on the

AV

1

2

3

4

6

7

V-AUX

unit using Bluetooth speakers/headphones.
5

AUDIO

1

2

3

PHONO

TUNER

BLUETOOTH

USB

NET

Playing back Bluetooth device music on the
unit
Follow the procedure below to establish a Bluetooth connection
between a Bluetooth device (such as smartphones) and the unit, and

BLUETOOTH

play back music stored the Bluetooth device on the unit.
MAIN

PARTY

ZONE 2

HDMI OUT

The unit

SCENE

1

2

PROGRAM

3

MUTE

4

Bluetooth device
(such as smartphones)

Y
The unit does not support video playback via Bluetooth.

1

VOLUME

Press BLUETOOTH to select “Bluetooth” as the input
source.

TOP MENU

POP-UP/MENU

ON
SCREEN

2

OPTION

On the Bluetooth device, select the unit (network name of
the unit) from the available device list.

ENTER

RETURN

The unit

DISPLAY

Bluetooth speakers/
headphones

A connection between the Bluetooth device and the unit will be
made.

BAND
MODE

TUNING

External device
operation keys

PRESET

SUR. DECODE STRAIGHT
MOVIE

MUSIC

INFO

SLEEP

1

2

5

6

7

8

9

0

MEMORY

ENT

ENHANCER PURE DIRECT

3

4

Y

If the pass key is required, enter the number “0000”.

• To use the Bluetooth function, set “Bluetooth” (p.133) in the “Setup” menu to “On”.
• You cannot make Bluetooth connections to a Bluetooth device (such as smartphones)
and Bluetooth speakers/headphones at the same time.

3

On the Bluetooth device, select a song and start playback.
The playback screen (artist name, album name and song title) is

• Stand the wireless antenna upright for connecting to a Bluetooth device wirelessly.

displayed on the TV.

For details, see “Preparing the wireless antenna” (p.39).

X

X

For details on supported Bluetooth devices, see “Supported devices and file formats”

• If the unit detects the Bluetooth device previously connected, the unit automatically
connects to the Bluetooth device after Step 1. To establish another Bluetooth

(p.163).

connection, first terminate the current Bluetooth connection.
• To terminate the Bluetooth connection, perform one of the following operations.
– Perform the disconnect operation on the Bluetooth device.
– Select an input source other than “Bluetooth” on the unit.
– Select “Disconnect” in “Setup menu items” (p.120) in the “Setup” menu.
• You can use the external device operation keys (a, s, d, f, g) on the
remote control to control playback.

En

80

Enjoying audio using Bluetooth
speakers/headphones
5

2

3

4

6

7

V-AUX

2

3

PHONO

TUNER

BLUETOOTH

USB

NET

PARTY

HDMI OUT

Bluetooth speakers/headphones.

between Bluetooth speakers/headphones and the unit, and enjoy audio

AUDIO

1

Use the cursor keys and ENTER to check the desired

Follow the procedure below to establish a Bluetooth connection

AV

1

4

Input selection keys

played back on the unit using Bluetooth speakers/headphones.

Y
• To use this function, set “Transmitter” (p.134) in the “Setup” menu to “On”.

MAIN

ZONE 2

• AirPlay and DSD audio cannot be delivered.
SCENE

1

2

PROGRAM

3

MUTE

TOP MENU

4

1

VOLUME

POP-UP/MENU

ON
SCREEN

ON SCREEN

OPTION

Cursor keys
ENTER

ENTER

RETURN

DISPLAY
BAND

2
3

Use the input selection keys (except BLUETOOTH) to

X

select an input source.

The checkmark indicates the Bluetooth device currently selected.

5

Press ON SCREEN.

While the Bluetooth speakers/headphones are in the
pairing mode, use the cursor keys to select “CONNECT”
and press ENTER.

Use the cursor keys and ENTER to select “Setup” !
“Bluetooth” ! “Audio Send” ! “Device Search” and
“OK”.

MODE

TUNING

PRESET

The list of available Bluetooth devices (BD addresses) is displayed.

SUR. DECODE STRAIGHT
MOVIE

MUSIC

INFO

SLEEP

1

2

3

5

6

7

8

9

0

MEMORY

ENT

ENHANCER PURE DIRECT

4

When the connection process finishes, audio played back on the
unit will be reproduced from the Bluetooth speakers/headphones.

6

To exit from the menu, press ON SCREEN.

X
To terminate the Bluetooth connection, perform the disconnect operation on the
Bluetooth speakers/headphones.

Y
• AirPlay and DSD audio cannot be delivered.
• When the Pure Direct mode is enabled, input sources other than the network sources
and USB cannot be delivered.

En

81

Playing back music stored on a USB storage device
You can play back music files stored on a USB storage device on the unit.
1

5

2

3

4

6

7

V-AUX

AUDIO

1

2

3

PHONO

TUNER

BLUETOOTH

USB

NET

PARTY

HDMI OUT

Playback of USB storage device contents

The unit supports USB mass storage class devices (FAT16 or FAT32

AV

USB

format).

Follow the procedure below to operate the USB storage device contents

X

and start playback.

For details on playable file formats, see “Supported devices and file formats” (p.163).

You can control the USB memory device with the menu displayed on the
TV screen.

MAIN

ZONE 2

Connecting a USB storage device

SCENE

1

2

3

4

1

Press USB to select “USB” as the input source.
The browse screen is displayed on the TV.

PROGRAM

MUTE

VOLUME

1

Connect the USB storage device to the USB jack.
The unit (front)

TOP MENU

POP-UP/MENU
(CONNECT)
PROGRAM

ON
SCREEN

ENTER

OPTION
RETURN

DISPLAY

PHONES

ENTER

USB

5V

RETURN

1A

YPAO MIC

SILENT CINEMA

DISPLAY
BAND

MODE

TUNING

X

PRESET

SUR. DECODE STRAIGHT
MOVIE

MUSIC

If playback is ongoing on your USB storage device, the playback screen is

ENHANCER PURE DIRECT
INFO

SLEEP

1

2

5

6

7

8

9

0

MEMORY

ENT

displayed.
3

4

USB storage device

USB
Connected

VOL.
SL

L C R
SW
SR
SBR

SBL

X
If the USB storage device contains many files, it may take time to load the them. In this
case, “Loading...” appears in the front display.

Y
• Stop playback of the USB storage device before disconnect it from the USB jack.
• Connect a USB memory device directly to the USB jack of the unit. Do not use
extension cables.
• The unit cannot charge USB devices while it is in standby mode.

En

82

2

Use the cursor keys to select an item and press ENTER.
If a song is selected, playback starts and the playback screen is
displayed.

AV

1

2

3

4

5

6

7

V-AUX

■ Browse screen
a
b
c
e

AUDIO

1

2

3

PHONO

TUNER

BLUETOOTH

USB

NET

PARTY

HDMI OUT

d
MAIN

ZONE 2

a Status indicators

SCENE

1

2

PROGRAM

3

MUTE

TOP MENU

4

VOLUME

POP-UP/MENU

ON
SCREEN

RETURN

DISPLAY
BAND

MODE

TUNING

X

b List name

• To return to the previous screen, press RETURN.

c Contents list

• To return to the top screen during menu operations on the browse screen,

OPTION

ENTER

hold down RETURN.
Menu operation keys
Cursor keys
ENTER
RETURN

Displays the list of USB storage device contents. Use the cursor keys (q/w) to
select an item and press ENTER to confirm the selection.

• Files not supported by the unit cannot be selected.

d Item number/total

• If the unit detects a series of unsupported files (such as images and hidden

e Operation menu

files) during playback, playback stops automatically.
• You can register your favorite items as shortcuts and access them directly by

PRESET

SUR. DECODE STRAIGHT
MOVIE

Display the current shuffle/repeat settings (p.84) and playback status (such as
play/pause).

Press the cursor key (r) and then use the cursor keys (q/w) to select an item.
Press ENTER to confirm the selection.

selecting the shortcut numbers (p.100).

MUSIC

Menu

ENHANCER PURE DIRECT
INFO

SLEEP

1

2

3

4

5

6

7

8

9

0

MEMORY

ENT

Function

1 Page Up
Moves to the previous/next page of the list.
1 Page Down
10 Pages Up
Moves 10 pages forward/backward.
10 Pages Down

En

83

Return

Returns to the higher-level list.

Now Playing

Moves to the playback screen.

Screen Off

Closes the screen display and shows the background.
Press one of the menu operation keys to redisplay it.

■ Playback screen

■ Shuffle/repeat settings
You can configure the shuffle/repeat settings for playback of USB storage

a
b

device contents.

AV

1

2

3

4

5

6

7

V-AUX

c

AUDIO

1

2

3

PHONO

TUNER

BLUETOOTH

USB

NET

PARTY

HDMI OUT

MAIN

ZONE 2

2

PROGRAM

MUTE

X

Display the current shuffle/repeat settings (p.84) and playback status (such as
play/pause).

4

• To return to the previous screen during menu operations, press RETURN.

b Playback information

VOLUME

Use the cursor keys to select “Shuffle” (Shuffle) or
“Repeat” (Repeat) and press ENTER.

a Status indicators

3

When “USB” is selected as the input source, press
OPTION.

2

SCENE

1

1

• Texts in parentheses denote indicators on the front display.

Displays the artist name, album name, song title, and elapsed time.
TOP MENU

Use the cursor keys (q/w) to select scrollable information.

POP-UP/MENU

ON
SCREEN

OPTION

ENTER

RETURN

DISPLAY
BAND

OPTION
Menu operation keys
Cursor keys
ENTER
RETURN

c Operation menu

3

Press the cursor key (r) and then use the cursor keys (q/w) to select an item.
Press ENTER to confirm the selection.
Menu

Item

Shuffle
(Shuffle)

Function

MODE

TUNING

External device
operation keys

PRESET

Use the cursor keys (e/r) to select a setting.

Browse

Moves to the browse screen.

Screen Off

Closes the screen display and shows the background.
Press one of the menu operation keys to redisplay it.

Setting
Off (Off)

Turns off the shuffle function.

On (On)

Plays back songs in the current album
(folder) in random order.
“x” appears on the TV screen.

Off (Off)

Turns off the repeat function.

One (One)

Plays back the current song repeatedly.
“c” appears on the TV screen.

All (All)

Plays back all songs in the current
album (folder) repeatedly.
“v” appears on the TV screen.

SUR. DECODE STRAIGHT
MOVIE

MUSIC

INFO

SLEEP

1

2

3

4

5

6

7

8

9

0

MEMORY

ENT

ENHANCER PURE DIRECT

X

Repeat
(Repeat)

You can use the external device operation keys (a, s, d, f, g) on the remote
control to control playback.

4

En

84

Function

To exit from the menu, press OPTION.

Playing back music stored on media servers (PCs/NAS)
You can play back music files stored on your PC or DLNA-compatible NAS on the unit.

Media sharing setup

Y

To play back music files stored on your PC or DLNA-compatible NAS, first you need to configure

• To use this function, the unit and your PC must be connected to the same router (p.39). You can check whether

the media sharing setting on each music server.

the network parameters (such as the IP address) are properly assigned to the unit in “Network Connection”
(p.131) in the “Information” menu.

■ For a PC with Windows Media Player installed

• The audio may be interrupted while using the wireless network connection. In this case, use the wired network
connection.

The setting procedure may vary depending on the PC and Windows Media Player version (The

X

following procedure is a setup example for Windows Media Player 12).

For details on playable file formats, see “Supported devices and file formats” (p.163).

1
2
3
4
5

Start Windows Media Player 12 on your PC.
Select “Stream”, then “Turn on media streaming”.
Click “Turn on media streaming”.
Select “Allowed” from the drop-down list next to the unit’s model name.
Click “OK” to exit.

X
For details on media sharing settings, refer to Windows Media Player help.

■ For a PC or a NAS with other DLNA server software
installed
Refer to the instruction manual for the device or software and configure the media sharing
settings.

En

85

Playback of PC music contents
AV

1

5

2

3

4

6

7

V-AUX

3

Use the cursor keys to select an item and press ENTER.

Follow the procedure below to operate the PC music contents and start

If a song is selected, playback starts and the playback screen is

playback.

displayed.

You can control the PC/NAS with the menu displayed on the TV screen.

AUDIO

1

2

3

PHONO

TUNER

BLUETOOTH

USB

NET

PARTY

HDMI OUT

MAIN

ZONE 2

NET

1

Press NET repeatedly to select “SERVER” as the input
source.
The browse screen is displayed on the TV.

SCENE

1

2

PROGRAM

3

MUTE

4

X

VOLUME

• To return to the previous screen, press RETURN.
TOP MENU

POP-UP/MENU

ON
SCREEN

• To return to the top screen during menu operations on the browse screen, hold down

OPTION

ENTER

RETURN

DISPLAY

RETURN.
• Files not supported by the unit cannot be selected.

Cursor keys
ENTER
RETURN

during playback, playback stops automatically.

If playback of a music file selected from the unit is ongoing on your PC, the

MODE

TUNING

• If the unit detects a series of unsupported files (such as images and hidden files)

X

BAND

PRESET

playback screen is displayed.

MUSIC
ENHANCER PURE DIRECT

INFO

SLEEP

1

2

3

4

5

6

7

8

9

0

MEMORY

ENT

2

• You can register your favorite items as shortcuts and access them directly by
selecting the shortcut numbers (p.100).

SUR. DECODE STRAIGHT
MOVIE

Use the cursor keys to select a music server and press
ENTER.

En

86

■ Browse screen
a
b
c

AV

1

2

3

4

5

6

7

V-AUX

■ Playback screen
a
b

2

3

PHONO

TUNER

BLUETOOTH

USB

NET

PARTY

HDMI OUT

MAIN

ZONE 2

d

2

PROGRAM

3

MUTE

a Status indicators

a Status indicators

SCENE

1

4

Display the current shuffle/repeat settings (p.88) and playback status (such as
play/pause).

POP-UP/MENU

ON
SCREEN

Displays the artist name, album name, song title, and elapsed time.

Displays the list of PC content. Use the cursor keys (q/w) to select an item and
press ENTER to confirm the selection.

OPTION

ENTER

RETURN

DISPLAY

Menu operation keys
Cursor keys
ENTER

BAND
MODE

TUNING

External device
operation keys

PRESET

Display the current shuffle/repeat settings (p.88) and playback status (such as
play/pause).

b Playback information

b List name

VOLUME

c Contents list
TOP MENU

c

e

AUDIO

1

Use the cursor keys (q/w) to select scrollable information.

c Operation menu
Press the cursor key (r) and then use the cursor keys (q/w) to select an item.
Press ENTER to confirm the selection.

d Item number/total
e Operation menu
Press the cursor key (r) and then use the cursor keys (q/w) to select an item.
Press ENTER to confirm the selection.

Menu

Function

Browse

Moves to the browse screen.

Screen Off

Closes the screen display and shows the background.
Press one of the menu operation keys to redisplay it.

SUR. DECODE STRAIGHT

Menu

MOVIE

MUSIC

INFO

SLEEP

1

2

3

4

5

6

7

8

9

0

MEMORY

ENT

Function

ENHANCER PURE DIRECT

1 Page Up
Moves to the previous/next page of the list.
1 Page Down
10 Pages Up

X
• You can use the external device operation keys on the remote control to control

Moves 10 pages forward/backward.
10 Pages Down
Return

Returns to the higher-level list.

Now Playing

Moves to the playback screen.

Screen Off

Closes the screen display and shows the background.
Press one of the menu operation keys to redisplay it.

En

playback (some functions may not work depending on the PC/NAS).
• You can also use a DLNA-compatible Digital Media Controller (DMC) to control
playback. For details, see “DMC Control” (p.112).

87

■ Shuffle/repeat settings
You can configure the shuffle/repeat settings for the playback of PC
music content.
AV

1

2

3

4

5

6

7

V-AUX

1

1

2

3

PHONO

TUNER

BLUETOOTH

USB

NET

PARTY

HDMI OUT

MAIN

ZONE 2

2

2

3

Use the cursor keys to select “Shuffle” (Shuffle) or
“Repeat” (Repeat) and press ENTER.

SCENE

1

When “SERVER” is selected as the input source, press
OPTION.

AUDIO

X

4

• To return to the previous screen during menu operations, press RETURN.
PROGRAM

MUTE

TOP MENU

VOLUME

• Text in parentheses denotes indicators on the front display.

POP-UP/MENU

ON
SCREEN

OPTION

ENTER

RETURN

DISPLAY

OPTION

3

Item

Cursor keys
ENTER
RETURN

Shuffle
(Shuffle)

BAND
MODE

TUNING

Use the cursor keys (e/r) to select a setting.

PRESET

Setting
Off (Off)

Turns off the shuffle function.

On (On)

Plays back songs in the current album
(folder) in random order.
“x” appears on the TV screen.

Off (Off)

Turns off the repeat function.

One (One)

Plays back the current song repeatedly.
“c” appears on the TV screen.

All (All)

Plays back all songs in the current
album (folder) repeatedly.
“v” appears on the TV screen.

SUR. DECODE STRAIGHT
MOVIE

MUSIC

INFO

SLEEP

1

2

3

4

5

6

7

8

9

0

MEMORY

ENT

ENHANCER PURE DIRECT

Repeat
(Repeat)

4

Function

To exit from the menu, press OPTION.

En

88

Listening to Internet radio
You can listen to Internet radio stations from all over the world.
1

2

3

4

5

6

7

V-AUX

• To use this function, the unit must be connected to the Internet (p.39). You can check
whether the network parameters (such as the IP address) are properly assigned to

AUDIO

1

2

3

PHONO

TUNER

BLUETOOTH

USB

NET

Playback of Internet radio

Y

AV

NET

1

source.

the unit in “Network” (p.131) in the “Information” menu.

The browse screen is displayed on the TV.

• You may not be able to receive some Internet radio stations.
MAIN

PARTY

ZONE 2

HDMI OUT

• The unit uses the airable.Radio service. airable is a service of Tune In GmbH.
• This service may be discontinued without notice.

SCENE

1

2

Press NET repeatedly to select “NET RADIO” as the input

3

4

• Folder names are different depending on the language.
PROGRAM

MUTE

TOP MENU

VOLUME

POP-UP/MENU

ON
SCREEN

OPTION

ENTER

RETURN

DISPLAY

Cursor keys
ENTER
RETURN

2

MODE

TUNING

Use the cursor keys to select an item and press ENTER.
If an Internet radio station is selected, playback starts and the

BAND

PRESET

playback screen is displayed.

SUR. DECODE STRAIGHT
MOVIE

MUSIC

INFO

SLEEP

1

2

3

5

6

7

8

9

0

MEMORY

ENT

ENHANCER PURE DIRECT

4

X
• To return to the previous screen, press RETURN.
• You can register your favorite items as shortcuts and access them directly by
selecting the shortcut numbers (p.100).

En

89

■ Browse screen
a
b
c

AV

1

2

3

4

5

6

7

V-AUX

■ Playback screen
a
b

2

3

PHONO

TUNER

BLUETOOTH

USB

NET

PARTY

HDMI OUT

MAIN

ZONE 2

d

SCENE

1

2

3

4

a Playback indicator

a Playback indicator

b List name

b Playback information
Displays the station name, album name, song title, and elapsed time.

c Contents list
PROGRAM

MUTE

VOLUME

Displays the list of Internet radio content. Use the cursor keys (q/w) to select
an item and press ENTER to confirm the selection.
TOP MENU

POP-UP/MENU

ON
SCREEN

e Operation menu
RETURN

DISPLAY

Menu operation keys
Cursor keys
ENTER

Use the cursor keys (q/w) to select scrollable information.

c Operation menu
Press the cursor key (r) and then use the cursor keys (q/w) to select an item.
Press ENTER to confirm the selection.

d Item number/total

OPTION

ENTER

c

e

AUDIO

1

Press the cursor key (r) and then use the cursor keys (q/w) to select an item.
Press ENTER to confirm the selection.

Menu

Function

Add to favorites

Adds the current station to the “Favorites” folder (p.91).

Browse

Moves to the browse screen.

Screen Off

Closes the screen display and shows the background.
Press one of the menu operation keys to redisplay it.

BAND

Menu

MODE

TUNING

External device
operation keys

PRESET

SUR. DECODE STRAIGHT
MOVIE

MUSIC

INFO

SLEEP

1

2

3

5

6

7

8

9

0

MEMORY

ENT

ENHANCER PURE DIRECT

Add to favorites
(Remove from
favorites)

Function
Adds/removes the station selected in the list to/from the
“Favorites” folder (p.91).

4

1 Page Up
Moves to the previous/next page of the list.
1 Page Down

X
• You can use the external device operation key (s) on the remote control to stop
playback.

10 Pages Up
Moves 10 pages forward/backward.
10 Pages Down
Return

Returns to the higher-level list.

Now Playing

Moves to the playback screen.

Screen Off

Closes the screen display and shows the background.
Press one of the menu operation keys to redisplay it.

En

90

• Some information may not be available depending on the station.

Registering favorite Internet radio stations (Favorites)
By registering your favorite Internet radio stations to “Favorites”, you
can quickly access to them from the “Favorites” folder in the browse

AV

1

2

3

4

5

6

7

V-AUX

screen.

X

AUDIO

1

2

3

PHONO

TUNER

BLUETOOTH

USB

NET

PARTY

HDMI OUT

You can also register up to 40 favorite USB and network contents or Bluetooth input
source as shortcuts (p.100).

MAIN

ZONE 2

■ Registering the station on the
browse/playback screen

SCENE

1

2

PROGRAM

3

MUTE

TOP MENU

4

1

VOLUME

screen or start playback of it to display the playback
screen.

POP-UP/MENU

ON
SCREEN

OPTION

Cursor keys
ENTER

ENTER

RETURN

DISPLAY

Select the desired Internet radio station in the browse

2

Press the cursor key (r) to select “Add to favorites” and
press ENTER.

BAND
MODE

TUNING

The selected station is added to the “Favorites” folder.

PRESET

SUR. DECODE STRAIGHT
MOVIE

MUSIC

INFO

SLEEP

1

2

3

4

5

6

7

8

9

0

MEMORY

ENT

Radio stations registered to favorites are displayed with “S”.

ENHANCER PURE DIRECT

Browse screen

X
To remove a station that is registered to favorites, select the station and then select
“Remove from favorites”.

En

91

Playing back iTunes/iPod music with AirPlay
The AirPlay function allows you to play back iTunes/iPod music on the unit via network.

Playback of iTunes/iPod music contents

iTunes

Follow the procedure below to play back iTunes/iPod music contents on the unit.

PC

(wired or wireless)

1

Router

Turn on the unit, and start iTunes on the PC or display the playback screen
on the iPod.

The unit

If the iTunes/iPod recognizes the unit, the AirPlay icon appears.
iTunes (example)

(wired or wireless)

iPhone/iPad/iPod touch

iOS 10 (example)

Y
If the icon does not appear, check whether the unit and PC/iPod are connected to the router properly.

Y

2

• To use this function, the unit and your PC or iPod must be connected to the same router. You can check whether
the network parameters (such as the IP address) are properly assigned to the unit in “Network” (p.141) in the

On the iTunes/iPod, click (tap) the AirPlay icon and select the unit (network
name of the unit) as the audio output device.

“Information” menu.
• When using a multiple SSID router, access to the unit might be restricted depending on the SSID to connect.

3

Connect the iPod to the SSID which can access the unit.

Select a song and start playback.

X

The unit automatically selects “AirPlay” as the input source and starts playback.

• For details on supported iPod devices, see “Supported devices and file formats” (p.163).

The playback screen is displayed on the TV.

• You can restrict access to the unit using the AirPlay Password (p.103).

X
• You can turn on the unit automatically when starting playback on iTunes or iPod by setting “Network Standby”
(p.132) in the “Setup” menu to “On”.
• You can edit the network name (the unit’s name on the network) displayed on iTunes/iPod in “Network Name”
(p.133) in the “Setup” menu.
• You can adjust the unit’s volume from the iTunes/iPod during playback. To disable volume controls from
iTunes/iPod, set “Volume Interlock” (p.112) in the “Input” menu to “Off”.

Caution
When you use iTunes/iPod controls to adjust volume, the volume may be unexpectedly loud. This could
result in damage to the unit or speakers. If the volume suddenly increases during playback, stop
playback on the iTunes/iPod immediately.

En

92

■ Playback screen
a
b
AV

1

2

3

4

5

6

7

V-AUX

c

AUDIO

1

2

3

PHONO

TUNER

BLUETOOTH

USB

NET

PARTY

HDMI OUT

MAIN

ZONE 2

a Playback indicator

SCENE

1

2

3

4

b Playback information
Displays the artist name, album name, song title, and elapsed/remaining time.

PROGRAM

MUTE

Use the cursor keys (q/w) to select scrollable information.

VOLUME

c Operation menu
TOP MENU

POP-UP/MENU

ON
SCREEN

Press the cursor key (r) to select an item. Press ENTER to confirm the selection.

OPTION

ENTER

RETURN

DISPLAY

Menu operation keys
Cursor keys
ENTER

Menu
Screen Off

Function
Closes the screen display and shows the background.
Press one of the menu operation keys to redisplay it.

BAND
MODE

TUNING

External device
operation keys

PRESET

SUR. DECODE STRAIGHT
MOVIE

MUSIC

INFO

SLEEP

1

2

3

5

6

7

8

9

0

MEMORY

ENT

ENHANCER PURE DIRECT

X
You can use the external device operation keys (a, s, d, f, g) on the remote
control to control playback.

4

En

93

Playing back videos/audio in multiple rooms (multi-zone)
The multi-zone function allows you to play back different input sources in the room where the

■ Enjoying videos/music in another room

unit is installed (main zone) and in another room (Zone2).

You can enjoy videos/music using a TV placed in another room.

For example, while you are watching TV in the living room (main zone), another person can
listen to radio in the study room (Zone2).

Enjoying videos/music using a TV and speakers

• Audio signals that can be output to Zone2 vary depending on how you connect the device in Zone2 to
the unit’s output jacks. For details, see “Multi-zone output” (p.165).

Video (HDMI)

Multi-zone configuration examples

Audio (SPEAKERS or ZONE OUT)

Since there are many possible ways to use the unit in a multi-zone configuration, we
recommend that you consult with your nearest authorized Yamaha dealer or service center

Guest room
(Zone2)

about the multi-zone connections that best meet your requirements.

■ Enjoying music in another room

Living room (main zone)
Connections
TV: p.96

You can enjoy music using speakers placed in another room.

Speakers (connecting to the unit directly): p.30
Speakers (using an external amplifier): p.95

Enjoying videos/music using only a TV

Audio (SPEAKERS or ZONE OUT)

Study room
(Zone2)
Video/audio (HDMI)
Living room (main zone)
Connections
Speakers (connecting to the unit directly): p.30

Study room
(Zone2)

Speakers (using an external amplifier): p.95
Living room (main zone)
Connection
TV: p.96

En

94

Preparing Zone2

■ Connecting speakers to play back audio
Connect speakers to play back audio in Zone2. The connection method varies depending on

Connect the device that will be used in Zone2 to the unit.

the amplifier being used (the unit or an external amplifier).

Caution

Using the unit’s internal amplifier

• Remove the unit’s power cable from the AC wall outlet before connecting speakers or an external
amplifier.

Connect the speakers placed in Zone2 to the unit with speaker cables. For details, see

• Ensure that the bare wires of the speaker cable do not touch one another or come into contact with
the unit’s metal parts. Doing so may damage the unit or the speakers. If the speaker cables short
circuit, “Check SP Wires” will appear on the front display when the unit is turned on.

“Connecting Zone2 speakers” (p.30).

Using an external amplifier
Connect the external amplifier placed in Zone2 to the unit with a stereo pin cable and connect
speakers to the external amplifier.
The unit (rear)
HDMI (HDCP2.2)

HDMI OUT
(HDCP2.2)

2

AV 2

1
ARC

(ZONE OUT)

AV 1

(1 BD/DVD)

AV 3

AV 1

AV 2

AV 3

AV 4

(1 BD/DVD)

AV 4

ZONE OUT (ZONE2) jacks

COMPONENT VIDEO

Y

AV 1

PB

A

PR

ZONE OUT

VIDEO

B

AUDIO 2

Y

AUDIO 3

PR

PB

AV 2

PRE OUT

ZONE OUT

L

(SINGLE)

L

R

R
2 OPTICAL

3 COAXIAL

4 COAXIAL

5 COAXIAL

6 OPTICAL

ZONE 2

R

FRONT
SURROUND

L

SURROUND

SUR. BACK

R

SUB

EXTRA S
SURROUND

ZONE 2
ANTENNA
(4 RADIO)

75ȍ

FM

AM

ZONE

External amplifier
Audio input
(analog stereo)
L
R
AUDIO

Zone2

Main zone

X
You can adjust the volume for Zone2 output with the unit. When using an external amplifier with volume control,
set “Volume” (p.135) in the “Setup” menu to “Fixed”.
En

95

■ Connecting an HDMI-compatible device to play back
videos/audio

• Videos/audio interruptions may happen in another zone when any of the following operations is
performed.
– Tuning on/off a TV connected to the unit via HDMI or switching the TV input

Connect an HDMI-compatible device (such as a TV) to play back videos/audio at Zone2.

– Enabling/disabling a zone output or selecting its input source

Y

– Changing the sound mode or audio settings

• To watch videos played back on a video device at Zone2, you need to connect the video device to the unit with
an HDMI cable (p.34).
• We recommend that you disable HDMI Control on the playback devices connected to the unit.

■ Operating the unit from Zone2 (remote connection)

• On-screen operations are not available for Zone2.

You can operate the unit or external devices from Zone2 using the remote control supplied
with each device if you connect an infrared signal receiver/emitter to the unit’s REMOTE

HDMI OUT 2 (ZONE OUT) jack

The unit (rear)

HDMI OUT

HDMI OUT
(HDCP2.2)

2

1
ARC

(ZONE OUT)

IN/OUT jacks.

AV 1

2(1 B

(HDCP2.2)

X

(ZONE OUT)
AV 1

AV 2

(1 BD/DVD)

AV 3

AV 4
Y

HDMI

(China, Korea, U.K., Europe and Russia models only)

VIDEO

PHONO
L

AUDIO 1

AUDIO 2

You can operate external devices with the supplied remote control if you register a remote control code for each

Y

AUDIO 3

(2 TV)

L

device. For details, refer to “Supplement for Remote Control” on the supplied CD-ROM.
R

R

GND

1 OPTICAL

2 OPTICAL

3 COAXIAL

4 COAXIAL

5 COAXIAL

6 OPTICAL

ZO

REMOTE IN/OUT jacks
The unit (rear)

ANTENNA
(4 RADIO)

75ȍ

FM

AM

HDMI (HDCP2.2)

HDMI OUT

(Example: using a TV)

(HDCP2.2)

2

HDMI input

AV 2

DVD)

1
ARC

(ZONE OUT)

1

AV 3

AV 1

AV 2

AV 3

NETWO

AV 4

AV 5

AV 6

AV 7

(1 BD/DVD)

AV 4

TRIGGER
OUT

COMPONENT VIDEO

Y

AV 1

Y

AV 2

A

PB

PR

PB

PR

1

IN

OUT

2

IN

B

PRE OUT

ZONE OUT

(SINGLE)

REMOTE

REMOTE

12V 0.1A
MAX. TOTAL

HDMI

OUT

1

HDMI
2

AXIAL

5 COAXIAL

6 OPTICAL

ZONE 2

FRONT

SURROUND

SUR. BACK

SUBWOOFER

CENTER

SPEAKERS
R

SURROUND

L

R

EXTRA SP2
SURROUND BACK

L

R

EXTRA SP1
F.PRESENCE

L

CENTER

TENNA
RADIO)

AM

SINGLE

ZONE 2

ZONE 2/BI-AMP

Infrared signal
transmitter

Infrared signal
receiver

Zone2

External device
(such as a CD player)

Main zone

Remote control
(supplied with each device)

To assign the HDMI OUT 2 (ZONE OUT) jack to Zone2, set “HDMI OUT2 Assign” (p.136) in the
“Setup” menu to “Zone2”.

X
• When the HDMI OUT 2 (ZONE OUT) jack is assigned to Zone2, you can enable/disable the audio output from the

Zone2

HDMI OUT 2 jack by setting “Audio Output” (p.130) in the “Setup” menu to “On” or “Off” (default).

Main zone

• You can also use speakers placed in Zone2 to output audio (p.30).

En

96

Remote connections between Yamaha products
An infrared signal transmitter is not required if you are using Yamaha products that support
remote connections, as the unit does. You can transmit remote control signals by connecting
the REMOTE IN/OUT jacks with monaural mini-jack cables and an infrared signal receiver.
REMOTE IN/OUT jacks
REMOTE

REMOTE IN/OUT jacks
REMOTE

IN

IN

OUT

OUT

Infrared signal
receiver
Yamaha products
(up to six, including the unit)

Remote control

Zone2

En

97

Controlling Zone2
z
AV

1

5

2

3

4

6

7

V-AUX

3

PHONO

AUDIO

1

2

Input selection keys

1
2

4

station.
Set MAIN/ZONE2 to “ZONE2”.

Refer to the instruction manual for the external device.
For details on the following operations, see the corresponding

Press z (receiver power).

pages.

Each time you press the key, Zone2 is enabled or disabled.
TUNER

USB

BLUETOOTH

NET

When Zone2 is enabled, “ZONE2” lights up in the front display.
MAIN

PARTY

ZONE 2

HDMI OUT

MAIN/ZONE2
SCENE

1

2

PROGRAM

3

MUTE

4

VOLUME

3

Use the input selection keys to select an input source.

Y
output” (p.165).

TOP MENU

POP-UP/MENU

OPTION

ENTER

• You cannot select Bluetooth, USB and network sources exclusively for each

• Playing back music stored on a USB storage device (p.82)

• Listening to Internet radio (p.89)
• Playing back iTunes/iPod music with AirPlay (p.92)

BAND

Y

PRESET

• The on-screen operations are not available for Zone2. Use the front display or

SUR. DECODE STRAIGHT
MUSIC

web control (p.101) to control Zone2.

ENHANCER PURE DIRECT
INFO

only) (p.76)
• Playing back music via Bluetooth (p.80)

• Playing back music stored on media servers (PCs/NAS) (p.85)

DISPLAY

TUNING

only) (p.72)

for the main zone, the input source for the main zone also switches to

MODE

MOVIE

Russia models) (p.69)
• Listening to DAB radio (Australia, U.K., Europe and Russia models

zone. For example, if you select “SERVER” for Zone2 when “USB” is selected
“SERVER”.
RETURN

• Listening to FM/AM radio (except Australia, U.K., Europe and

• Listening to FM radio (Australia, U.K., Europe and Russia models

• Audio signals that can be output to Zone2 vary depending on how you connect
the device in Zone2 to the unit’s output jacks. For details, see “Multi-zone

ON
SCREEN

Start playback on the external device or select a radio

SLEEP

1

2

3

5

6

7

8

9

0

MEMORY

ENT

• AirPlay is available in Zone2 only when AirPlay playback is ongoing in the main

4

zone.

X
• The Zone2 input automatically switches in conjunction with the input source
selected in the main zone when “Main Zone Sync” is selected as the Zone2
input with the web control (p.101) or AV CONTROLLER (p.9).
• To play back DSD audio in Zone2, select “Main Zone Sync” as the Zone2 input
or use the party mode (p.99).

Caution
To avoid unexpected noise, never play back DTS-CDs in Zone2.

En

98

■ Other operations for Zone2
The following functions are also available when Zone2 is enabled.

■ Enjoying the same source in multiple
rooms (party mode)
The party mode allows you to play back in Zone2 the same music that is

AV

1

2

3

4

5

6

7

V-AUX

Adjusting the volume

being played back in the main zone. During the party mode, stereo

Press VOLUME or MUTE.

playback is automatically selected for all zones. Utilize this function

AUDIO

1

2

3

PHONO

TUNER

BLUETOOTH

USB

NET

when you want to use main zone music as background music for a house
Selecting the input source and settings at once (SCENE)

party.

Press SCENE.
MAIN

PARTY

ZONE 2

HDMI OUT

PARTY
SCENE

1

2

PROGRAM

3

MUTE

TOP MENU

4

VOLUME

SCENE

VOLUME

POP-UP/MENU

MUTE
ON
SCREEN

OPTION

1

X
To register the current settings (input source, volume and tone control) to a scene, hold

Each time you press the key, the party mode is turned on or off.

down the desired SCENE key until “SET Complete” appears on the front display.

When the party mode is turned on, “PARTY” lights up in the front
display.

Setting the sleep timer
Press SLEEP repeatedly to set the time (120 min, 90 min, 60 min, 30 min,

Y

off).

If the party mode does not work on Zone2, set “Party Mode Set” (p.136) in the “Setup”
menu to “Enable” (default).

ENTER

Playing back digitally compressed formats (such as MP3, etc.) with

RETURN

enriched sound (Compressed Music Enhancer)

DISPLAY

Press ENHANCER.

BAND
MODE

TUNING

PRESET

SUR. DECODE STRAIGHT
MOVIE

MUSIC

INFO

SLEEP

1

2

3

4

5

6

7

8

9

0

MEMORY

ENT

Press PARTY.

ENHANCER PURE DIRECT

ENHANCER
SLEEP

En

99

Registering favorite items (shortcut)
You can register up to 40 favorite USB and network contents or Bluetooth
1

2

3

4

6

7

V-AUX

shortcut numbers.
5

1

2

3

PHONO

TUNER

BLUETOOTH

USB

NET

PARTY

HDMI OUT

ZONE 2

Recall a registered item by selecting the shortcut number.

X

AUDIO

MAIN

Recalling a registered item

input source as shortcuts and access them directly by selecting the

AV

BLUETOOTH
USB
NET

• You can also use the “Favorites” feature to register Internet radio stations (p.91).
• Only the input source will be registered for Bluetooth and AirPlay. Individual
contents cannot be registered.

1
2

2

3

4

Registering an item
PROGRAM

MUTE

Recall Preset
01:USB

VOLUME

Select a desired item and register it to a shortcut number.
TOP MENU

Use the numeric keys to enter a shortcut number (01 to 40).
You can also use PRESET on the front panel to select a shortcut.

SCENE

1

Press BLUETOOTH, USB or NET.

POP-UP/MENU

ON
SCREEN

1
2

OPTION

ENTER

RETURN

Play back a song or a radio station to be registered.

Memory Preset
01:Empty

BAND
MODE

TUNING

PRESET

SUR. DECODE STRAIGHT
MUSIC

INFO

SLEEP

1

2

3

4

5

6

7

8

9

0

MEMORY

ENT

SL

L C R
SW
SR
SBR

SBL

• “No Presets” appears when no items are registered.

– The PC/NAS which contains the registered item is turned off or not connected to the
network.
– The registered network content is temporarily unavailable or out of service.
– The registered item (file) has been deleted or moved to another location.
– A Bluetooth connection cannot be established.

To change a shortcut number to which the item will be registered, use numeric
keys to select the shortcut number after Step 2.

Memory Preset
02:Empty

• When you register music files stored on a USB storage device or a PC/NAS, the unit
memorizes the relative position of the music files in the folder. If you have added or
deleted any music files to or from the folder, the unit may not recall the music file
correctly. In such cases, register the items again.

VOL.
SL

L C R
SW
SR
SBR

SBL

To confirm the registration, press MEMORY.

En

• The registered content (songs and Internet radio stations) can be displayed as a list
and easily recalled by using MusicCast CONTROLLER (p.59) on your mobile device.

“Empty” (not in use) or item currently registered

3

Y

– The USB storage device which contains the registered item is not connected to the
unit.

VOL.

X

MEMORY

L C R
SW
SR
SBR

SBL

• The registered item cannot be recalled in the following cases.

Shortcut number (flashes)

ENHANCER PURE DIRECT

Numeric keys

SL

• “Empty” appears when a preset number not in use is entered.

Press MEMORY.

DISPLAY

MOVIE

VOL.

100

Controlling the unit from a web browser (web control)

X

You can control the unit with the web control screen displayed in a web browser.

• You can check the IP address of the unit in “Network” (p.141) in the “Information” menu.

Web browser

• You can bookmark the unit’s IP address in the browser or create a shortcut link (p.103) to access the web
control screen quickly in the future. However, if you are using a DHCP server, the IP address of the unit may
change each time the unit is turned on.

Web control

Web control

• If you have enabled the MAC Address Filter (p.132), you need to specify the MAC address of your PC to allow the
PC to access the unit. For information on how to check the MAC address of your PC, refer to its instruction

(wired or wireless)
PC

manual.

(wired or wireless)
Router

The unit

• By using the application for smartphone/tablet “AV CONTROLLER”, you can control the unit from an iPhone,

Y

iPad, iPod touch or Android devices (p.9).

• To use this function, the unit and your PC must be connected to the same router.
• Some security software installed on your PC may block the access of the unit to your PC. In these cases,
configure the security software appropriately.
• To display the web control screen or turn on the unit from the web control when the unit is in standby mode,
set “Network Standby” (p.103) to “On”.
• We recommend using one of the following web browsers.
– Internet Explorer 11.x
– Safari 9.x

1
2

Start the web browser.
Enter the IP address of the unit in the address bar of the web browser.
(Example)

En

101

Top menu screen

Control screen
c

a

e

a

f
b
c
d

d

e

g

b

f

a PLAY INFO

a CONTROL

Selects an input source or controls playback for the selected zone.

Moves to the control screen for the selected zone.

b TOP MENU

b STATUS

Moves to the top menu screen.

Turns on/off the power for each zone or displays the input source and volume set for each zone.

c SCENE

c SETTINGS

Selects a scene for the selected zone.

Moves to the settings screen.

d POWER

d PARTY MODE

Turns on/off the power for the selected zone.

Turns on/off the party mode (p.99).

e VOLUME

e SYSTEM POWER

Adjusts the volume or mutes the audio output for the selected zone. You can also select the increments
used for volume adjustment.

Turns on/off the power for all zones.

f MAIN VOLUME

f RELOAD

Adjusts the volume or mutes the audio output for the main zone. You can also select the increments used
for volume adjustment.

Reloads the current status of the unit.

Y

g RELOAD
Reloads the current status of the unit.

Multi-zone volume adjustment is not available when an external amplifier is used.

En

102

Settings screen

Google Analytics
Displays an explanation of data collection by Google Analytics. Data collection can be enabled or
disabled at any time.

b BACK
Moves to the top menu screen.

c RELOAD

a

Reloads the current status of the unit.

Note
• If the network settings are changed, you may need to restart the browser or regain access to the unit.

b

• When using the MAC address filter, make sure you specify the MAC addresses of your network devices
correctly. Otherwise, the unit will be inaccessible from your network devices such as PCs and other
external devices.

c

a Rename

• Do not operate the unit during the recovery process, as this may result in the incorrect recovery of the
settings. When the recovery finishes, click “OK” to set the unit to standby mode.

Edits the network name (the unit’s name on the network) (p.133) or the name of each zone (p.134). Click
“APPLY” to apply the changes to the unit.

• The backup does not contain user information (such as user account and password) or unit-specific
information (such as MAC address and IP address).

Network

• Some characters entered with a PC may not appear correctly on the unit.

Selects the network connection method (p.131) or configures the network parameters (such as IP
address) (p.131). Click “APPLY” to apply the changes to the unit.

AirPlay Password
Sets the password to restrict access to the unit via AirPlay (p.92). Click “APPLY” to apply the changes to
the unit.

MAC Filter
Sets the MAC address filter (p.132) to limit access to the unit from the network devices. Click “APPLY” to
apply the changes to the unit.

Auto Reload
Enables/disables automatic reloading. When “Auto Reload” is “On” (enabled), the web control screen
reloads the status of the unit every 5 seconds.

Network Standby
Enables/disables the network standby function (p.132).

Backup/Recovery
Creates a backup of the unit’s settings on the PC or restores the settings from the backup.

Firmware
Updates the firmware of the unit by using the firmware you have downloaded on the PC.
Follow the on-screen instructions to start the firmware update.

Create Link
Creates a shortcut link to the desired control screen.

Tips
Displays tips for use of the web control.

Licenses
Displays the licenses of the software used in the unit.
En

103

Viewing the current status
AV

1

5

2

3

6

AV 1-7

selected) on the front panel display or TV.

VIDEO AUX

7

V-AUX

2

3

PHONO

TUNER

BLUETOOTH

USB

NET

PARTY

HDMI OUT

AUDIO 1-3

Switching information on the front display

1

2

PROGRAM

3

MUTE

TOP MENU

Press INFO repeatedly to select between the various

TUNER (FM/AM)

Info
Audio Decoder

VOL.
SL

L C R
SW
SR
SBR

SBL

TUNER (DAB)

Item name

POP-UP/MENU

OPTION

About 3 seconds after a display item is selected, its corresponding

RETURN

AV1
†‡ Dsur

DISPLAY
BAND

MODE

TUNING

PRESET

SUR. DECODE STRAIGHT
MOVIE

MUSIC

INFO

SLEEP

1

2

5

6

7

8

9

0

MEMORY

ENT

Bluetooth
USB

information appears.

ENTER

VOL.
SL

L C R
SW
SR
SBR

SBL

SERVER
AirPlay

Information

ENHANCER PURE DIRECT

INFO
3

4

DSP Program (sound mode name), Audio Decoder
(decoder name*)
* (U.K., Europe and Russia models only)
Radio Data System data is also available when the unit is
tuned into a Radio Data System broadcasting station
(p.78).

4

VOLUME

ON
SCREEN

DSP Program (sound mode name), Audio Decoder
(decoder name*)

(AM radio feature is not available on the Australia, U.K.,
Europe and Russia models)

display items.

SCENE

1

Item

PHONO

AUDIO

ZONE 2

You can view the current status (input or DSP program currently
4

1

MAIN

Currently input
source

See “Displaying the DAB information” (p.74) for details.
Song (song title), Artist (artist name), Album (album
name), DSP Program (sound mode name), Audio
Decoder (decoder name*)
Song (song title), Artist (artist name), Album (album
name), DSP Program (sound mode name), Audio
Decoder (decoder name*), IP Address (IP address),
Ethernet MAC (Ethernet MAC address), Wi-Fi MAC (Wi-Fi
MAC address)

NET RADIO

Song (song title), Album (album name), Station (station
name), DSP Program (sound mode name), Audio
Decoder (decoder name*), IP Address (IP address),
Ethernet MAC (Ethernet MAC address), Wi-Fi MAC (Wi-Fi
MAC address)

MusicCast Link

DSP Program (sound mode name), Audio Decoder
(decoder name*), IP Address (IP address), Ethernet MAC
(Ethernet MAC address), Wi-Fi MAC (Wi-Fi MAC address)

X
Available items vary depending on the selected input source. The displayed item can

(Australia, U.K., Europe and Russia models only)

also be applied separately to each input source.

* The name of the audio decoder currently activated is displayed. If no audio decoder
is activated, “Decoder Off” appears.

En

104

Viewing the status information on the TV

1

AV

1

2

3

4

5

6

7

V-AUX

The following information is displayed on the TV.
Input source/
Party mode status

AUDIO

1

2

3

PHONO

TUNER

BLUETOOTH

USB

NET

PARTY

HDMI OUT

MAIN

ZONE 2

Press DISPLAY.

Compressed Music
Enhancer status

Volume/YPAO
Volume status

CINEMA DSP status

Sound mode

SCENE

1

2

PROGRAM

3

MUTE

TOP MENU

4

VOLUME

POP-UP/MENU

ON
SCREEN

OPTION

Audio format/
Decoder

ENTER

RETURN

DISPLAY
BAND

MODE

TUNING

DISPLAY

2

To close the information display, press DISPLAY.

PRESET

SUR. DECODE STRAIGHT
MOVIE

MUSIC

INFO

SLEEP

1

2

3

5

6

7

8

9

0

MEMORY

ENT

ENHANCER PURE DIRECT

4

En

105

Configuring playback settings for different playback sources (Option menu)
You can configure separate playback settings for different playback sources. This menu is

Option menu items

available on the front panel (or on the TV screen), allowing you to easily configure settings

X

during playback.

1

• Available items vary depending on the selected input source.

Press OPTION.

• Text in parentheses denotes indicators on the front display.

Front display

Option
Tone Control

• Default settings are underlined.

Item

VOL.
SL

L C R
SW
SR
SBR

TV screen

YPAO Volume
(YPAO Volume)

Dialogue
(Dialog)

2

Use the cursor keys to select an item and press ENTER.

X

3
4

Use the cursor keys (e/r) to select a setting.
Subwoofer/Bass
(Subwoofer/Bass)

To exit from the menu, press OPTION.
Enhancer
(Enhancer)

Video Processing
(Video Process.)

En

106

Page
107

YPAO Volume
(YPAO Vol.)

Enables/disables YPAO Volume.

107

Adaptive DRC
(A.DRC)

Sets whether the dynamic range (from maximum to
minimum) is automatically adjusted when the volume is
adjusted.

107

Dialogue Level
(Dialog Lvl)

Adjusts the volume of dialogue sounds.

108

DTS Dialogue
Control
(DTS Dialog)

Adjusts the volume of dialogue sounds for DTS:X
contents.

108

Dialogue Lift
(Dialog Lift)

Adjusts the perceived height of dialogue sounds.

108

Adjusts the delay between video and audio output.

108

Lipsync Adjustment
(Lipsync Adj.)

To return to the previous screen during menu operations, press RETURN.

Function
Adjusts the level of high-frequency range and
low-frequency range individually.

Tone Control
(Tone Control)

SBL

Subwoofer Trim
Fine-adjusts the subwoofer volume.
(SW.Trim)

108

Extra Bass
(Extra Bass)

Enables/disables Extra Bass.

108

Enhancer
(Enhancer)

Enables/disables Compressed Music Enhancer.

109

Hi-Res Mode
(HiRes Mode)

Enables/disables the high-resolution mode (for
enhancing the quality of uncompressed digital audio).

109

Enables/disables the video signal processing settings
configured in the “Setup” menu.

109

Item

Function
Corrects volume differences between input sources.

109

Audio Select
(A.Sel)

Selects the audio input jack to use when more than one
audio connection is made for one input source.

109

Video Out
(V.Out)

Selects a video to be output with the audio input source.

110

FM Mode
(FM Mode)

Switches between stereo and monaural for FM radio
reception.

110

Init Scan
(Init Scan)

(Australia, U.K., Europe and Russia models only)

Tune AID
(Tune AID)

(Australia, U.K., Europe and Russia models only)

Shuffle
(Shuffle)

Configures the shuffle setting for the USB storage device
(p.84) or media server (p.88).

-

Repeat
(Repeat)

Configures the repeat setting for the USB storage device
(p.84) or media server (p.88).

-

Input Settings
(Input Settings)

■ YPAO Volume (YPAO Volume)

Page

Input Trim
(In.Trim)

Enables/disables YPAO Volume or Adaptive DRC.

YPAO Volume (YPAO Vol.)
Enables/disables YPAO Volume. When YPAO Volume is enabled, the high- and low-frequency

Performs an initial scan for DAB radio reception.

Checks reception strength of each DAB channel label.

levels are automatically adjusted according to the volume so that you can enjoy natural
sounds even at low volume.
Settings

72

74

Off (Off)

Disables YPAO Volume.

On (On)

Enables YPAO Volume.

X
• YPAO Volume works effectively after the measurement results of “Auto Setup” have been already saved (p.43).
• We recommend enabling both YPAO Volume and Adaptive DRC when you are listening at lower volumes or at
night.

Adaptive DRC (A.DRC)

■ Tone Control (Tone Control)

Sets whether the dynamic range (from maximum to minimum) is automatically adjusted when

Adjusts the level of high-frequency range (Treble) and low-frequency range (Bass) individually.

the volume level is adjusted. When it is set to “On”, it is useful for listening to playback at a low
volume at night.

Choices
Treble (Treble), Bass (Bass)

Settings

Setting range
-6.0 dB to 0.0 dB to +6.0 dB, *0.5 dB increments

Y

Off (Off)

The dynamic range is not automatically adjusted.

On (On)

Automatically adjusts the dynamic range when YPAO Volume is enabled.

• When both “Treble” and “Bass” are 0.0 dB, “Bypass” appears.

If “On” is selected, the dynamic range becomes narrow at a low volume and wide at a high

• If you set an extreme value, sounds may not match those from other channels.

volume.

X
Output level

repeatedly to select “Treble” or “Bass”, and PROGRAM to make an adjustment.

On
Off
Input level

En

107

Volume: high
Output level

Volume: low

You can also adjust the “Tone Control” setting with the front panel controls by pressing TONE CONTROL

On
Off
Input level

■ Dialogue (Dialog)

■ Lipsync Adjustment (Lipsync Adj.)

Adjusts the volume or perceive height of dialogue sounds.

Adjusts the delay between video and audio output.
Setting range
0 ms to 500 ms (1 ms increments)

Dialogue Level (Dialog Lvl)

X

Adjusts the volume of dialogue sounds. If dialogue sounds cannot be heard clearly, you can
turn up its volume by increasing this setting.

This setting is available only when “Delay Enable” (p.127) in the “Setup” menu is set to “Enable” (default).

Setting range
0 to 3

■ Subwoofer/Bass (Subwoofer/Bass)

X

Adjust the subwoofer volume or bass sound.

This setting is not available when DTS:X content is played back, or when the Dolby Surround or Neural:X decoder
is working.

Subwoofer Trim (SW.Trim)
Fine-adjusts the subwoofer volume.

DTS Dialogue Control (DTS Dialog)

Setting range
-6.0 dB to 0.0 dB to +6.0 dB (0.5 dB increments)

Adjusts the volume of dialogue sounds for DTS:X contents.
Setting range
0 to 6

Extra Bass (Extra Bass)

X

Enables/disables Extra Bass. When Extra Bass is enabled, you can enjoy enhanced bass

This setting is available only when DTS:X content which supports the DTS Dialogue Control feature is played back.

sounds, regardless of the size of the front speakers and the presence or absence of the
subwoofer.

Dialogue Lift (Dialog Lift)

Settings

Adjusts the perceived height of dialogue sounds. If the dialogue sounds as if it is coming from
below the TV screen, you can raise its perceived height by increasing this setting.

X
This setting is available only when one of the following conditions is met.
– One of the sound programs (except for 2ch Stereo and 7ch Stereo) is selected when front presence speakers are
used.
– Virtual Presence Speaker (VPS) (p.64) is working.
(You may hear dialogue sounds from the surround speakers depending on the listening position.)

Setting range
0 to 5 (The bigger the value the higher the position)

Ideal position

En

108

Off (Off)

Disables Extra Bass.

On (On)

Enables Extra Bass.

■ Enhancer (Enhancer)

■ Video Processing (Video Process.)

Enables/disables Compressed Music Enhancer and the high-resolution mode.

Enables/disables the video signal processing (resolution and aspect ratio) settings configured
in “Processing” (p.129) in the “Setup” menu.

Enhancer (Enhancer)

Settings

Enables/disables Compressed Music Enhancer (p.68).

X
• This setting is applied separately to each input source.

Direct (Direct)

Disables the video signal processing.

Processing
(Processing)

Enables the video signal processing.

• You can also use ENHANCER on the remote control to enable/disable Compressed Music Enhancer (p.68).

■ Input Settings (Input Settings)

Settings
Off (Off)

Disables Compressed Music Enhancer.

Configures the input settings.

On (On)

Enables Compressed Music Enhancer.

X
This setting is applied separately to each input source.

Default
TUNER, Bluetooth, USB, (network sources): On (On)

Input Trim (In.Trim)

Others: Off (Off)

Corrects volume differences between input sources. If you are bothered by volume differences

Y

when switching between input sources, use this function to correct it.

Compressed Music Enhancer does not work on the following audio sources.
– Signals whose sampling frequency is over 48 kHz

Setting range
-6.0 dB to 0.0 dB to +6.0 dB (0.5 dB increments)

– DSD audio

Hi-Res Mode (HiRes Mode)

Audio Select (A.Sel)

Enables/disables the high-resolution mode when “Enhancer” is set to “On”. If this function is

Selects the audio input jack to use when more than one audio connection is made for one input

set to “On”, you can enhance the quality of uncompressed digital audio (such as 2-channel

source.

PCM and FLAC) using Compressed Music Enhancer.

Settings

Settings

Automatically selects the audio input jack in the following priority order.
Enables the high-resolution mode.

On (On)

(The high-resolution mode may not work depending on the audio signal
processing condition.)

Off (Off)

Disables the high-resolution mode.

Auto (Auto)

1. HDMI input
2. Digital input (COAXIAL or OPTICAL)
3. Analog input (AUDIO)

En

109

HDMI (HDMI)

Always selects HDMI input. No sounds are produced when no signals are input
through the HDMI jack.

Coax/Opt (Coax/Opt)

Always selects digital input (COAXIAL or OPTICAL). No sounds are produced when
no signals are input through the COAXIAL or OPTICAL jack.

Analog (Analog)

Always selects analog input (AUDIO). No sounds are produced when no signals are
input through the AUDIO jacks.

Video Out (V.Out)
Selects a video to be output with the audio input source.
Settings
Off (Off)

Does not output video.

AV 1-7 (AV1-7), VIDEO
AUX (V-AUX)

Outputs video input through the corresponding video input jacks.

■ FM Mode (FM Mode)
Switches between stereo and monaural for FM radio reception.
Settings
Stereo (Stereo)

Receives FM radio in stereo sounds.

Mono (Mono)

Receives FM radio in monaural sounds.

En

110

CONFIGURATIONS
Configuring input sources (Input menu)

4

Use the cursor keys (q/w) to select an item and press ENTER.

You can change the input source settings using the TV screen.

1
2

Press ON SCREEN.
Use the cursor keys to select “Input” and press ENTER.

X
To return to the previous screen during menu operations, press RETURN.

3

5
6

Use the cursor keys to select a setting and press ENTER.
To exit from the menu, press ON SCREEN.

Use the cursor keys (e/r) to select an input source to be configured and
press the cursor key (q).

Input menu items

X
• Available items vary depending on the selected input source.
• Default settings are underlined.

Item

The input source of the unit also changes.

X
You can still switch the input source by using cursor keys (e/r) after Step 3.

En

111

Function

Page

Rename/Icon Select

Changes the input source name and icon.

112

Decoder Mode

Sets the format of digital audio playback to DTS.

112

Volume Interlock

Enables/disables volume controls from iTunes/iPod via AirPlay.

112

DMC Control

Selects whether to allow a DLNA-compatible Digital Media
Controller (DMC) to control playback.

112

■ Rename/Icon Select

■ Decoder Mode

Changes the input source name and icon displayed on the front display or TV screen.

Sets the format of digital audio playback to “DTS”.

X

For example, if the unit does not detect DTS audio and outputs noise, set “Decoder Mode” to
“DTS”.

Some network input sources (such as “AirPlay”) cannot be renamed or have the icons changed.

■ Setup procedure

Input sources
AV 1-7, VIDEO AUX, AUDIO 1-3 (available only when any audio digital input jack is assigned)

1

Settings

Use the cursor keys (e/r) to select “Auto” or “Manual” and press the cursor key (w).
If you select “Auto”, the unit creates a name automatically according to the connected device. In
this case, skip Steps 3 and 4.

X
This step is available only when “AV1-7”, “VIDEO AUX” or “AUDIO1-3” (available only when any audio digital

Use the cursor keys (e/r) to select an icon and press the cursor key (w).

3

Press ENTER to enter the name edit screen.

4

Use the cursor keys and ENTER to rename and select “ENTER” to confirm the entry.

Automatically selects an audio format to match the input audio signal.

DTS

Selects DTS only. (Other audio signals are not reproduced.)

■ Volume Interlock

input jack is assigned) is selected.

2

Auto

Enables/disables volume controls from iTunes/iPod via AirPlay.
Input sources
AirPlay
Settings
Off

Disables volume controls from iTunes/iPod.

Limited

Enables volume controls from iTunes/iPod within the limited range (-80 dB to -20
dB and mute).

Full

Enables volume controls from iTunes/iPod in the full range (-80 dB to +16.5 dB
and mute).

■ DMC Control
Selects whether to allow DLNA-compatible Digital Media Controller (DMC) to control playback.

X
5

6

To clear the entry, select “CLEAR”.

Input source
SERVER

Use the cursor keys to select “OK” and press ENTER.

Settings

X

Disable

Does not allow DMCs to control playback.

To restore the default setting, select “RESET”.

Enable

Allows DMCs to control playback.

X

To exit from the menu, press ON SCREEN.

A Digital Media Controller (DMC) is a device that can control other network devices through the network. When
this function is enabled, you can control playback of the unit from DMCs (such as Windows Media Player 12) on
the same network.

En

112

Configuring the SCENE function (Scene menu)

5
6

You can change the settings of the SCENE function (p.61) using the TV screen.

1
2

Use the cursor keys and ENTER to change the setting.
To exit from the menu, press ON SCREEN.

Press ON SCREEN.

Scene menu items

Use the cursor keys to select “Scene” and press ENTER.

Item

3

Use the cursor keys (e/r) to select a scene to be configured and press the
cursor key (q).

Function

Page

Save

Registers the current settings in the selected scene.

113

Load

Loads the settings registered for the selected scene. You can also
configure the SCENE link playback setting, select items to be
included as the scene assignments, or view the settings currently
assigned to the selected scene.

114

Rename/Icon Select

Changes the scene name and icon.

115

Reset

Restores the default settings for the selected scene.

115

■ Save
Registers the unit’s current settings (such as input source and sound program) in the selected
scene.

X
If you have changed the input assignment for a scene, you also need to change the external device assigned to the
corresponding SCENE key (p.62).

X
You can still switch the scene by using cursor keys (e/r) after Step 3.

4

Use the cursor keys (q/w) to select an item and press ENTER.

En

113

■ Load

Check or uncheck

Loads the settings registered for the selected scene.
Select “DETAIL” to configure the SCENE link playback setting or view the scene assignments.

Device Control
Recalls a selected scene and starts its playback on an external device connected to the unit via
HDMI. (SCENE link playback)
Settings
Choices
Off

Disables the SCENE link playback function.

HDMI Control

Enables SCENE link playback using HDMI Control signals. Select this if an HDMI
Control-compatible device (such as a BD/DVD player) is connected to the unit via
HDMI. It also turns on the TV if it supports HDMI Control.

Input

Input (p.60), Station*1, Listening*1, Music Content*2, Playback*2, Audio Select
(p.109)
*1

Only when “TUNER” is selected

*2 Only when “Bluetooth”, “USB” or “NET” is selected

Default
SCENE1-2: HDMI Control

HDMI Output

HDMI Output (p.60)

SCENE3-12: Off

Mode

DSP Program (p.63), Pure Direct Mode (p.128), Enhancer (p.68), Enhancer Hi-Res
Mode (p.109)

Y

Sound

Tone Control (p.107), YPAO Volume (p.107), Adaptive DRC (p.107), Extra Bass
(p.108)

Surround

CINEMA DSP 3D Mode (p.128), Dialogue Lift (p.108), Dialogue Level (p.108),
Subwoofer Trim (p.108)

Video

Video Mode (p.129)

Volume

Master Volume (p.60)

To control playback of an HDMI Control-compatible device by SCENE link playback, you need to set “HDMI
Control” in the “Setup” menu to “On” and perform the HDMI Control link setup (p.165).

Detail
Selects items to be included as the scene assignments. You can also view the settings currently
assigned to the selected scene.

Lipsync

Lipsync (p.127), Delay (p.127)

To include items as the scene assignments, use the cursor keys to select an item and press

Speaker Setup

Setting Pattern (p.123), PEQ Select (p.126)

ENTER to check the box (or uncheck the box to exclude).
Default
Input, HDMI Output, Mode: selected

For example, if you often adjust the volume while watching TV but listen to radio with low
volume at night, exclude “Volume” from the assignments for SCENE2 and include “Volume” in

Sound, Surround, Video, Volume, Lipsync, Speaker Setup: not selected

the assignments for SCENE4.

X
The scene assignments can include radio stations, or the content on a selected USB storage device and a network
device.

En

114

■ Rename/Icon Select

Playing a radio station or content included as the scene assignments automatically when
pressing SCENE

Changes the scene name and icon displayed on the front display or TV screen.

Y

■ Setup procedure

Individual contents cannot be registered for “Bluetooth” and “AirPlay”. The content lastly played back on each
device will be recalled.

1

1

Use the cursor keys (e/r) to select an icon and press the cursor key (w).

2

Press ENTER to enter the name edit screen.

3

Use the cursor keys and ENTER to rename and select “ENTER” to confirm the entry.

In the “Detail” screen, use the cursor keys (q/w) to select “Input” and press the cursor key
(r).

2

Use the cursor keys (q/w) to set “Listening” or “Playback” to “On”.
When “TUNER” is selected, “Listening” is available.
When “Bluetooth”, “USB” or “NET” is selected, “Playback” is available.

3

If “Input” is unchecked, press ENTER to check the box.

4

To exit from the menu, press ON SCREEN.

X
To clear the entry, select “CLEAR”.

4

Use the cursor keys to select “OK” and press ENTER.

X
To restore the default setting, select “RESET”.

5

To exit from the menu, press ON SCREEN.

■ Reset
Restores the default settings (p.61) for the selected scene.

En

115

Configuring sound programs/surround decoders
(DSP Program menu)

4

Use the cursor keys (q/w) to select an item and press ENTER.

You can change the settings of the sound programs and surround decoders using the TV
screen.

1
2

Press ON SCREEN.
Use the cursor keys to select “DSP Program” and press ENTER.

X
• To return to the previous screen during menu operations, press RETURN.
• To restore the default settings for the selected sound program, select “Reset”.

5
6
3

Use the cursor keys (e/r) to select a sound program to be configured and
press the cursor key (q).

X
You can still switch the sound program by using cursor keys (e/r) after Step 3.

En

116

Use the cursor keys to select a setting and press ENTER.
To exit from the menu, press ON SCREEN.

DSP Program menu items

Item

Function

Settings
1.0 s to 5.0 s

X

Reverb Time

Adjust the decay time of the rear
reverberant sound.

Reverb Delay

0 ms to 250 ms
Adjusts the delay between the direct
sound and reverberant sound generation. Higher to enhance the delay
effect, and lower to reduce it.

Reverb Level

Adjusts the volume of the reverberant
sound.

• Available items vary depending on the selected sound program or surround decoder.
• Default settings are underlined.

■ Settings for sound programs
Item

Decode Type

Function

Selects a surround decoder to be used in
combination with the selected sound
program.

0% to 100%

Settings
Auto, bDsur*, Neural:X, Neo:6
Cinema, Neo:6 Music*
(* Available only when
“SURROUND DECODER” is
selected)
-6 dB to 0 dB to +3 dB

DSP Level

Adjusts the sound field effect level.

Initial Delay

Adjusts the delay between the direct
sound and presence sound field
generation.

Surround Initial Delay

Adjusts the delay between the direct
sound and surround sound field
generation.

Surround Back Initial
Delay

Adjusts the delay between the direct
sound and surround back sound field
generation.

Room Size

Adjusts the broadening effect of the
presence sound field.

Surround Room Size

Adjusts the broadening effect of the
surround sound field.

Surround Back Room Size

Adjusts the broadening effect of the
surround back sound field.

Liveness

Adjusts the loss of the presence sound
field.

Surround Liveness

Adjusts the loss of the surround sound
field.

Surround Back Liveness

Adjusts the loss of the surround back
sound field.

Higher to enrich the reverberant
sound and lower to have clear
sound.

Higher to enhance the sound
field effect, and lower to reduce
it.
1 ms to 99 ms
Higher to enhance the delay
effect, and lower to reduce it.

1 ms to 49 ms
Higher to enhance the delay
effect, and lower to reduce it.

0.1 to 2.0
Higher to enhance the
broadening effect, and lower to
reduce it.

0 to 10
Higher to enhance the
reflectivity, and lower to reduce
it.

En

117

Higher to strengthen the
reverberant sound, and lower to
weaken it.

■ Settings for decoders

The following items are available when you select “7ch Stereo”.
Item

Function

Level

Adjusts the entire volume.

Front / Rear Balance

Adjusts the front and rear volume
balance.

Left / Right Balance

Adjusts the left and right volume
balance.

The following items are available when you set “Decode Type” of “SURROUND DECODER” to

Settings

“bDsur” or “Neo:6 Music”.

-5 to 0 to +5
-5 to 0 to +5

Decode Type

Item

Higher to enhance the front side, and
lower to enhance the rear side.
bDsur

-5 to 0 to +5

Center Spread

Selects whether to spread
the center channel signals
to left and right when
2-channel source is
played.

Center Image

Adjusts the center
orientation level
(broadening effect) of the
front sound field.

Higher to enhance the right side, and
lower to enhance the left side.
0 to 5 to 10

Height Balance

Monaural Mix

Higher to enhance the upside, and
Adjust the height volume balance lower to enhance the downside. (The
using the front presence speakers. front presence speakers do not
produce sounds when “Height
Balance” is set to “0”.)

Neo:6 Music

Enables/disables monaural sound
Off, On
output.

X
Available items in “7ch Stereo” vary depending on the speaker system being used.

En

118

Function

Settings
Off, On
Select “On” to spread center channel
signals to left and right if you feel the
center sound is too strong when
2-channel source is played.
0.0 to 0.3 to 1.0
Higher to strengthen the center
orientation level (less broadening
effect) and lower to weaken (more
broadening effect).

Configuring various functions (Setup menu)

4

Use the cursor keys (q/w) to select an item and press ENTER.

You can configure the unit’s various function with the menu displayed on the TV screen.

1
2

Press ON SCREEN.
Use the cursor keys to select “Setup” and press ENTER.

X
To return to the previous screen during menu operations, press RETURN.

3

5
6
Use the cursor keys (e/r) to select a menu.

En

119

Use the cursor keys to select a setting and press ENTER.
To exit from the menu, press ON SCREEN.

Setup menu items
Menu

Item

Function
Automatically optimizes the speaker settings (YPAO).

Auto Setup

Registers two speaker setting patterns and switches between them.

123

Setting Data Copy

Copies the “Setting Pattern” parameters in the specified direction.

123

Configuration
Manual Setup

Lipsync

Sound

Video

43

Setting Pattern

Selects a speaker system.

123

Front

Selects the size of the front speakers.

124

Center

Selects whether or not a center speaker is connected and its size.

124

Surround

Selects whether or not surround speakers are connected and their size.

124

Surround Back

Selects whether or not surround back speakers are connected and their size.

124

Front Presence

Selects whether or not front presence speakers are connected and their size.

125

Subwoofer

Selects whether or not a subwoofer is connected and its phase.

125

Layout

Selects the layouts of the surround speakers and front presence speakers.

125

Power Amp Assign

Speaker

Page

Distance

Sets the distance between each speaker and listening position.

125

Level

Adjusts the volume of each speaker.

126

Parametric EQ

Adjusts the tone with an equalizer.

126

Test Tone

Enables/disables the test tone output.

126

Delay Enable

Enables/disables the Lipsync adjustment for each input source.

127

Auto/Manual Select

Selects the method to adjust the delay between video and audio output.

127

Adjustment

Adjusts the delay between video and audio output manually.

127

Dynamic Range

Selects the dynamic range adjustment method for bitstream audio (Dolby Digital and DTS signals) playback.

127

Max Volume

Sets the limit value of the volumes.

127

Initial Volume

Sets the initial volume for when this receiver is turned on.

128

Pure Direct Mode

Selects whether to output video signals during the Pure Direct mode.

128

Adaptive DSP Level

Selects whether to automatically adjust the CINEMA DSP effect level.

128

CINEMA DSP 3D Mode

Enables/disables CINEMA DSP HD3.

128

Virtual Presence Speaker

Selects whether to create Virtual Presence Speaker (VPS) using the front, center, and surround speakers.

128

Virtual Surround Back Speaker

Selects whether to create Virtual Surround Back Speaker (VSBS) using the surround speakers.

128

Object Decode Mode

Enables/disables playback of object-based audio signals such as Dolby Atmos or DTS:X contents.

128

Video Mode

Enables/disables the video signal processing (resolution and aspect ratio).

129

En

120

Menu

HDMI

Network

Item

Function

Page

HDMI Control

Enables/disables HDMI Control. You can also configure the relevant settings (such as ARC and TV audio input).

130

Audio Output

Selects a device to output audio.

130

Standby Through

Select whether to output videos/audio (input through HDMI jacks) to the TV when the unit is in standby mode.

131

Network Connection

Selects the network connection method.

131

IP Address

Configures the network parameters (such as IP address).

131

Network Standby

Selects whether to enable/disable the function that turns on the unit from other network devices.

132

MAC Address Filter

Sets the MAC address filter to limit access to the unit from other network devices.

132

Network Name

Edits the network name (the unit’s name on the network) displayed on other network devices.

133

MusicCast Link Power Interlock

Selects whether turning on the power of the master device of the MusicCast network (the unit) also turns on the power of
other devices of the network.

133

Bluetooth

Enables/disables the Bluetooth functions.

133

Disconnect

Terminates the Bluetooth connection between the Bluetooth device (such as smartphones) and the unit.

80

Bluetooth Standby

Selects whether to enable/disable the function that turns on the unit from Bluetooth devices (Bluetooth standby).

133

Transmitter

Enables/disables the Bluetooth audio transmitter function.

134

Device Search

Searches available Bluetooth devices (speakers/headphones) when the unit is used as a Bluetooth audio transmitter.

81

Zone Rename

Changes the zone name (for main zone) displayed on the front display or TV screen.

134

Volume

Enables/disables volume adjustments for Zone2 output.

135

Audio Receive
Bluetooth
Audio Send
Main Zone Set

Max Volume

Sets the Zone2 limit value of the volumes.

135

Initial Volume

Sets the Zone2 initial volume for when the unit is turned on.

135

Audio Delay

Adjusts the Zone2 audio output timing.

135

Mono

Switches between stereo and monaural for Zone2 output.

135

Enhancer

Enables/disables Compressed Music Enhancer for Zone2 output.

135

Tone Control

Adjusts the level of high-frequency range and low-frequency range for Zone2 output.

135

Zone2 Set
Multi Zone
Extra Bass

Enables/disables Extra Bass for Zone2 output.

136

Balance

Adjusts the front speaker balance for Zone2 output.

136

Changes the zone name (for Zone2) displayed on the front display or TV screen.

136

HDMI OUT2 Assign

Select the zone for which the HDMI OUT 2 (ZONE OUT) jack is used.

136

Party Mode Set

Enables/disables switching to the party mode.

136

Zone Rename

En

121

Menu

Item

Page
137

Assigns the desired function to the PROGRAM keys of the remote control.

137

Dimmer (Front Display)

Adjusts the brightness of the front display.

137

Short Message

Selects whether to display short messages on the TV screen when the unit is operated.

137

Wallpaper

Selects the image to be used as wallpaper on the TV.

138

Remote PROGRAM Key

Display Set

Function
Assigns the COMPONENT VIDEO, COAXIAL and OPTICAL jacks to another input source.

Input Assignment

Function
Trigger Output1

Trigger Mode

Specifies the condition for the TRIGGER OUT jack to function.

138

Trigger Output2

Target Zone

Specifies the zone with which the TRIGGER OUT jack functions are synchronized.

138

Memory Guard

Prevents accidental changes to the settings.

139

Auto Power Standby

Sets the amount of time for the auto-standby function.

139

ECO Mode

Enables/disables the eco mode (power saving mode).

140

Select an on-screen menu language.

140

ECO
Language

En

122

Speaker (Manual Setup)

■ Setting Data Copy
Copies the “Setting Pattern” parameters in the specified direction.

Configures the speaker settings manually.
Choices

X
• Some speaker settings are not available depending on the selected “Power Amp Assign” setting.
• Default settings are underlined.

Pattern1 ▶ 2

Copies the “Pattern1” parameters to “Pattern2”.

Pattern2 ▶ 1

Copies the “Pattern2” parameters to “Pattern1”.

■ Power Amp Assign
Selects a speaker system.
The unit has 7 built-in amplifiers. You can connect 2 to 9 speakers and up to 2 subwoofers (with
built-in amplifier) to create the favorite acoustic space in your room. You can also apply bi-amp
connections, channel expansion (using an external power amplifier) or multi-zone
configurations to enhance your system.
Settings

■ Setting Pattern
Registers two speaker setting patterns and switches between them.
When you configure the following speaker settings, the settings will be memorized in the

Basic

Select this option when you use the basic speaker configuration (up to 7-channel
plus front presence speakers) (p.18).

7.1 +1Zone

Select this option when you use Zone2 speakers in addition to the 7.1 system in
the main zone (p.27).

5.1.2 +1Zone

Select this option when you use Zone2 speakers in addition to the 5.1.2 system in
the main zone (p.28).

5.1 Bi-Amp

Select this option when you use the 5.1 system (including bi-amp front speakers)
(p.28).

7.1 Bi-Amp [ext.SB]

Select this option when you use the 7.1 system (including bi-amp front speakers
and surround back channel expansion using an external amplifier) (p.29).

selected pattern.
• Measurement results (Auto Setup)
• Power Amp Assign
• Configuration
• Distance
• Level
• Parametric EQ
Settings
Pattern1, Pattern2

X
• The setting pattern currently selected is shown at the top of the “Manual Setup” screen.
• This function is useful when you want to save certain settings according to the varying conditions of your
listening environment. For example, if you want to switch the settings when curtains are open or closed, you
can save the settings suited for each condition and switch between them.

En

123

■ Configuration

Surround

Configures the output characteristics of the speakers.

Selects whether or not surround speakers are connected and their sizes.

X

Settings

• When you configure the speaker size, select “Large” if the woofer diameter of your speaker is 16 cm (6-1/4”) or

Select this option for large speakers.

larger or “Small” if it is smaller than 16 cm (6-1/4”) as a guide.

Large

• When the speaker size is set to “Small”, you can configure the “Crossover” setting after pressing ENTER.
Frequency sounds lower than the specified value will be output from the subwoofer and higher will be output

Select this option for small speakers.

from the corresponding speakers.

Small

Front
None

Settings
Select this option for large speakers.

The front speakers will produce surround channel audio. Virtual CINEMA DSP
works when you select a sound program.

Surround Back

The front speakers will produce all of the front channel frequency components.

Selects whether or not surround back speakers are connected and their sizes.

Select this option for small speakers.
Small

The subwoofer or front speakers will produce surround channel low-frequency
components lower than the specified crossover frequency (default: 80 Hz).
Select this option when no surround speakers are connected.

Selects the size of the front speakers.

Large

The surround speakers will produce all of the surround channel frequency
components.

The subwoofer will produce front channel low-frequency components lower than
the specified crossover frequency (default: 80 Hz).

Settings
Select this option when one large speaker is connected.

X

Large x1

“Front” is automatically set to “Large” when “Subwoofer” is set to “None”.

The surround back speaker will produce all of the surround back channel
frequency components.
Select this option when two large speakers are connected.

Large x2

Center
Selects whether or not a center speaker is connected and its size.

Select this option when one small speaker is connected.

Settings
Large

Small x1
Select this option for large speakers.
The center speaker will produce all of the center channel frequency components.

None

The subwoofer or front speakers will produce surround back channel
low-frequency components lower than the specified crossover frequency
(default: 80 Hz).
Select this option when two small speakers are connected.

Select this option for small speakers.
Small

The surround back speakers will produce all of the surround back channel
frequency components.

Small x2

The subwoofer or front speakers will produce center channel low-frequency
components lower than the specified crossover frequency (default: 80 Hz).
Select this option when no center speaker is connected.

None

The front speakers will produce center channel audio.

The subwoofer or front speakers will produce surround back channel
low-frequency components lower than the specified crossover frequency
(default: 80 Hz).
Select this option when no surround back speakers are connected.
The surround speakers will produce surround back channel audio.

X
This setting is not available when “Surround” is set to “None”, or when “Layout (Surround)” is set to “Front”.

En

124

Front Presence

Layout

Selects whether or not front presence speakers are connected and their size.

Selects the layouts of the surround speakers and front presence speakers.

Settings

Surround

Large

Select this option for large speakers.

Small

Select this option for small speakers.

None

Select this option when no front presence speakers are connected.

Selects a surround speaker layout when surround speakers are used.
Settings
Rear

Select this option when surround speakers are placed on the rear side of the
room.

Front

Select this option when surround speakers are placed on the front side of the
room. Virtual CINEMA FRONT (p.66) works in this case.

Subwoofer
Selects whether or not a subwoofer is connected and its phase.

X

Settings

Normal

Select this option when a subwoofer is connected (phase not reversed). The
subwoofer will produce LFE (low-frequency effect) channel audio and
low-frequency components from other channels.

Reverse

Select this option when a subwoofer is connected (phase reversed). The
subwoofer will produce LFE (low-frequency effect) channel audio and
low-frequency components from other channels.

This setting is not available when “Configuration (Surround)” is set to “None”.

Front Presence

Use

Selects a front presence layout when front presence speakers are used. This setting facilitates
the optimization of the sound field effect.
Settings

None

Select this option when no subwoofer is connected. The front speakers will
produce LFE (low-frequency effect) channel audio and low-frequency
components from other channels.

Front Height

Select this option when front presence speakers are installed on the front side
wall.

X

Overhead

Select this option when front presence speakers are installed to the ceiling.

When the bass sound is lacking or unclear, switch the subwoofer phase.

Dolby Enabled SP

Select this option when using the Dolby Enabled speakers as the front presence
speakers.

X
• This setting is not available when “Configuration (Front Presence)” is set to “None”.
• To play Dolby Atmos contents using the front presence speakers, see “Presence speaker layout” (p.22).

■ Distance
Sets the distance between each speaker and listening position so that sounds from the
speakers reach the listening position at the same time. First, select the unit of distance from
“Meter” or “Feet”.
Choices
Front L, Front R, Center, Surround L, Surround R, Surround Back L, Surround Back R, Front Presence L, Front
Presence R, Subwoofer
Setting range
0.30 m to 3.00 m to 24.00 m (1.0 ft to 10.0 ft to 80.0 ft), *0.05 m (0.2 ft) increments

En

125

■ Level

4

Adjusts the volume of each speaker.

Use the cursor keys (e/r) to select a center frequency from the 7 preset bands (4 for
subwoofer) and the cursor keys (q/w) to adjust the gain.

Choices
Front L, Front R, Center, Surround L, Surround R, Surround Back L, Surround Back R, Front Presence L, Front
Presence R, Subwoofer
Setting range
-10.0 dB to 0.0 dB to +10.0 dB (0.5 dB increments)

■ Parametric EQ
Adjusts the tone with an equalizer.

Setting range
Gain: -20.0 dB to +6.0 dB

Settings
Manual

5

Select this option when you want to adjust the equalizer manually.

To fine-adjust the center frequency or Q factor (bandwidth), press ENTER repeatedly to select

For details, see “Manual equalizer adjustment”.

an item.

YPAO:Flat

Adjusts individual speakers to achieve the same characteristics.

YPAO:Front

Adjusts individual speakers to achieve the same characteristics as the front
speakers.

Frequency: Use the cursor keys (e/r) to adjust the center frequency of the selected band and
the cursor keys (q/w) to adjust the gain.

YPAO:Natural

Adjusts all speakers to achieve a natural sound.

Through

Does not use the equalizer.

Q: Use the cursor keys (e/r) to adjust the Q factor (bandwidth) of the selected band and the
cursor keys (q/w) to adjust the gain.
Setting range
Center frequency: 15.6 Hz to 16.0 kHz (15.6 Hz to 250.0 Hz for subwoofer)

X

Q factor: 0.500 to 10.080

“YPAO:Flat”, “YPAO:Front”, and “YPAO:Natural” are available only when the measurement results of “Auto

6

Setup” have already been saved (p.43). Press ENTER again to view the measurement results.

To exit from the menu, press ON SCREEN.

■ Manual equalizer adjustment

■ Test Tone

1

Set “Parametric EQ” to “Manual” and press ENTER.

Enables/disables the test tone output. Test tone output helps you to adjust the speaker

2

Press ENTER again to enter the edit screen.

3

Use the cursor keys to select a speaker and press ENTER.

balance or equalizer while confirming its effect.
Settings

X
• To restore the default settings for all speakers, select “PEQ Data Clear” and then “OK”.
• To copy the parametric equalizer values acquired with “Auto Setup” (p.43) to the “Manual” fields for fine
adjustment, select “PEQ Data Copy” and then an equalizer type.

En

126

Off

Does not output test tones.

On

Outputs test tones automatically when you adjust the speaker balance or
equalizer.

Sound

Adjustment
Adjusts the delay between video and audio output manually when “Auto/Manual Select” is set

Configures the audio output settings.

to “Manual”. You can fine-adjust the audio output timing when “Auto/Manual Select” is set to
“Auto”.

■ Lipsync

Setting range
0 ms to 500 ms (1 ms increments)

Adjusts the delay between video and audio by holding up the audio output.

X

Delay Enable

• “Offset” shows the difference between automatic adjustment and fine adjustment.

Enables/disables the Lipsync adjustment for each input source.

• This setting is also available in “Lipsync Adjustment” (p.108) in the “Option” menu.

Choices
AV 1-7, VIDEO AUX, AUDIO 1-3

■ Dynamic Range

Settings

Selects the dynamic range adjustment method for bitstream audio (Dolby Digital and DTS

Disable

Disable the Lipsync adjustment for the selected input source.

signals) playback.

Enable

Enables the Lipsync adjustment for the selected input source.

Settings

Auto/Manual Select

Maximum

Produces audio without adjusting the dynamic range.

Standard

Optimizes the dynamic range for regular home use.

Selects the method to adjust the delay between video and audio output.

Sets the dynamic range for clear sound even at night or at low volumes.
Minimum/Auto

Setting range

Auto

Adjusts the delay between video and audio output automatically when a TV that
supports an automatic lipsync function is connected to the unit via HDMI.

■ Max Volume

If necessary, you can fine-adjust the audio output timing in “Adjustment”.

Manual

When playing back Dolby TrueHD signals, the dynamic range is automatically
adjusted based on the input signal information.

Sets the limit value of the volume.

Select this option when you want to adjust the delay between video and audio
output manually.

Setting range
-30.0 dB to +15.0 dB (5.0 dB increments), +16.5 dB

Adjust the audio output timing in “Adjustment”.

Y
Even if “Auto/Manual Select” is set to “Auto”, the automatic adjustment does not work depending on the TV
connected to the unit. In this case, adjust the delay manually in “Adjustment”.

En

127

■ Initial Volume

■ Virtual Presence Speaker

Sets the initial volume when the receiver is turned on.

Selects whether to create Virtual Presence Speaker (VPS) using the front, center, and surround
speakers. When VPS is enabled, the unit creates front VPS when no front presence speakers are

Settings

connected, and creates rear VPS when front presence speakers are connected (p.64).
Off
On

Sets the level to the volume level of the unit when it last entered standby mode.
Settings

Sets at Mute or the specified volume level (-80 dB to +16.5 dB, 0.5 dB increments).
(This setting works only when the initial volume is set lower than “Max Volume”.)

Off

Disables Virtual Presence Speaker (VPS).

On

Enables Virtual Presence Speaker (VPS).

■ Pure Direct Mode

X

Selects whether to output video signals during the Pure Direct mode (p.68).

Depending on the installation height of the surround speakers, VPS may not be effective. In this case, set “Virtual
Presence Speaker” to “Off”.

Settings

Auto

Automatically outputs video signals when any videos are input from the selected
input source or an input source that can be operated with the on-screen display is
selected. When no video signals are input, the wall paper is displayed.

■ Virtual Surround Back Speaker

Video Off

Does not output video signals including the wall paper.

When VSBS is enabled, the unit creates VSBS when no surround back speakers are connected.

Selects whether to create Virtual Surround Back Speaker (VSBS) using the surround speakers.

Settings

■ Adaptive DSP Level

Off

Disables Virtual Surround Back Speaker (VSBS).

Selects whether to automatically adjust the CINEMA DSP effect level.

On

Enables Virtual Surround Back Speaker (VSBS).

Settings

X

Off

Does not adjust the effect level automatically.

On

Adjusts the effect level automatically according to the YPAO measurement results
and the volume level.

VSBS is effective only when 6.1- or 7.1-channel content is played back.

■ Object Decode Mode
Enables/disables playback of object-based audio signals such as Dolby Atmos or DTS:X

■ CINEMA DSP 3D Mode

contents.

Enables/disables CINEMA DSP HD3 (p.64). If this function is set to “On”, CINEMA DSP HD3

Settings

functions with the selected sound programs (except 2ch Stereo and 7ch Stereo).
Settings
Off
On

Disables CINEMA DSP HD3.
3

Enables CINEMA DSP HD .

Disable

Disables playback of object-based audio signals. Those signals will be played in
normal 5.1-/7.1-channel audio.

Enable

Enables playback of object-based audio signals.

X
If audio output is not available when Dolby Atmos or DTS:X signals are input, set “Object Decode Mode” to
“Enable”.

En

128

Video

Resolution
Selects a resolution to output HDMI video signals when “Video Mode” is set to “Processing”.

Configures the video output settings.

Settings
Through

Does not convert the resolution.

Auto

Selects a resolution automatically in accordance with TV resolution.

480p/576p, 720p,
1080i, 1080p, 4K

Output video signals with a selected resolution.
(Only the resolutions supported by your TV are selectable.)

X
If you need to select a resolution that is not supported by your TV, set “MONITOR CHECK” (p.144) in the
“ADVANCED SETUP” menu to “SKIP” and try again. (Note that the output video may not be displayed on your TV
normally.)

■ Video Mode
Enables/disables the video signal processing (resolution and aspect ratio).

Aspect

Settings
Direct
Processing

Selects an aspect ratio to output HDMI video signals when “Video Mode” is set to “Processing”.
Disables the video signal processing.

Settings

Enables the video signal processing.
Select a resolution and an aspect ratio in “Resolution” and “Aspect”.

X
• When “Video Mode” is set to “Direct”, the unit transmits video signals with the least circuitry in order to reduce

Through

Does not convert the aspect ratio.

16:9 Normal

Outputs 4:3 video signals to a 16:9 TV with black bands on either side of the
screen.

X

video output delay.

This setting functions only when 480i/576i or 480p/576p signals are converted into 720p, 1080i, 1080p, or 2160p

• When “Video Mode” is set to “Processing” and the resolution is being converted, short messages are not

(4K) signals.

displayed on the TV screen.

En

129

HDMI

ARC
Enables/disables ARC (p.167) when “HDMI Control” is set to “On”.

Configures the HDMI settings.

Settings
Off

Disables ARC.

On

Enables ARC.

Y
You do not need to change this setting normally. In case noises are produced from the speakers connected to the
unit because TV audio signals input to the unit via ARC are not supported by the unit, set “ARC” to “Off” and use
the TV’s speakers.

Standby Sync

■ HDMI Control

Select whether to use HDMI control to link the standby behavior of the TV and the unit when

Enables/disables HDMI Control (p.165).

“HDMI Control” is set to “On”.

Settings
Settings
Off
On

Disables HDMI Control.
Off

Does not set the unit to standby mode when the TV is turned off.

On

Sets the unit to standby mode when the TV is turned off.

Auto

Sets the unit to standby mode when the TV is turned off only when the unit is
receiving TV audio or HDMI signals.

Enables HDMI Control.
Configure the settings in “TV Audio Input”, “ARC” and “Standby Sync”.

Y
To use HDMI control, you need to perform the HDMI Control link setup (p.165) after connecting HDMI
Control-compatible devices.

■ Audio Output
Selects a device to output audio.

TV Audio Input
Selects an audio input jack of the unit to be used for TV audio input when “HDMI Control” is set

X

to “On”. The unit’s input source automatically switches to TV audio when the TV input is

• The “HDMI OUT1” setting is available only when “HDMI Control” is set to “Off”.

switched to its built-in tuner.

• The “HDMI OUT2” setting is available only when “HDMI OUT2 Assign” (p.136) is set to “Main”.

Settings
AUDIO 1-3

HDMI OUT1, HDMI OUT2
Enables/disables the audio output from a TV connected to the HDMI OUT 1 jack or HDMI OUT

Default
AUDIO 1

2 jack.

Y

Settings

When using ARC to input TV audio to the unit, you cannot use the input jacks selected here for connecting an
external device because the input will be used for TV audio input.

Off

Disables the audio output from the TV.

On

Enables the audio output from the TV.

Y
The HDMI OUT 1-2 jacks output 2-channel audio signals when the unit is turned on.
En

130

Network

■ Standby Through
Select whether to output videos/audio (input through HDMI jacks) to the TV when the unit is in

Configures the network settings.

standby mode. If this function is set to “On” or “Auto”, you can use the input selection keys (AV
1-7 and V-AUX) to select an HDMI input even when the unit is in standby mode (the standby
indicator on the unit blinks).
Settings
Off

(This setting is available only when “HDMI Control” is set to “Off”.)
Does not output videos/audio to the TV.

On

Outputs videos/audio to the TV.
(The unit consumes more power than when “Off” is selected.)

Auto

Outputs videos/audio to the TV. If no signals are detected, the unit is set to the
power saving mode.

■ Network Connection
Selects the network connection method.
Settings
Wired

Select this option when you want to connect the unit to a network with a
commercially-available network cable (p.39).

Wireless (Wi-Fi)

Select this option when you want to connect the unit to a network via the wireless
router (access point). For details on settings, see “Connecting the unit to a
wireless network” (p.52).

Wireless Direct

Select this option when you want to connect a mobile device to the unit directly.
For details on settings, see “Connecting a mobile device to the unit directly
(Wireless Direct)” (p.57).

■ IP Address
Configures the network parameters (such as IP address).

DHCP
Select whether to use a DHCP server.
Settings

En

131

Off

Does not use a DHCP server. Configure the network parameters manually. For
details, see “Manual network settings”.

On

Uses a DHCP server to automatically obtain the unit’s network parameters (such
as IP address).

■ Manual network settings

■ MAC Address Filter

1
2

Sets the MAC address filter to limit access to the unit from other network devices.

3

Set “DHCP” to “Off”.
Use the cursor keys (q/w) to select a parameter type and press ENTER.

Filter

IP Address

Specifies an IP address.

Enables/disables the MAC address filter.

Subnet Mask

Specifies a subnet mask.

Settings

Default Gateway

Specifies the IP address of the default gateway.

DNS Server (P)

Specifies the IP address of the primary DNS server.

DNS Server (S)

Specifies the IP address of the secondary DNS server.

Off

Disables the MAC address filter.

On

Enables the MAC address filter. In “MAC Address 1-10”, specify the MAC addresses
of the network devices that will be permitted access to the unit.

X

Use the cursor keys (e/r) to move the edit position and the cursor keys (q/w) to select a

AirPlay (p.92) and DMC (p.112) operations are not subject to the MAC address filter.

value.

4

To confirm the setting, press ENTER.

5

To configure another network parameter, repeat steps 2 to 4.

6

To save the changes, use the cursor keys to select “OK” and press ENTER.

7

To exit from the menu, press ON SCREEN.

MAC Address 1-10
Specifies the MAC addresses (up to 10) of the network devices that will be permitted access to
the unit when “Filter” is set to “On”.
■ Setup procedure

1

Use the cursor keys (q/w) to select “MAC Address 1-5” or “MAC Address 6-10” and press
ENTER.

■ Network Standby
Selects whether the unit can be turned on from other network devices (network standby).

2

Use the cursor keys (q/w) to select an MAC address number and press ENTER.

Settings

3

Use the cursor keys (e/r) to move the edit position and the cursor keys (q/w) to select a

Off
On

value.

Disables the network standby function.
Enables the network standby function.
(The unit consumes more power than when “Off” is selected.)
Enables the network standby function.

Auto

(If “Network Connection” is set to “Wired”, the unit is set to the power saving
mode when the network cable is disconnected.)

With an advanced energy saving design, this product achieves a low power consumption of not
more than two watts when in Network Standby mode.

En

132

4

To confirm the setting, press ENTER.

5

To save the changes, use the cursor keys to select “OK” and press ENTER.

6

To exit from the menu, press ON SCREEN.

Bluetooth

■ Network Name
Edits the network name (the unit’s name on the network) displayed on other network devices.

Configures the Bluetooth settings.
■ Setup procedure

1

Press ENTER to enter the name edit screen.

2

Use the cursor keys and ENTER to rename and select “ENTER” to confirm the entry.

■ Bluetooth
Enables/disables the Bluetooth function (p.80).
Settings

X
To clear the entry, select “CLEAR”.

3

Disables the Bluetooth function.

On

Enables the Bluetooth function.

Use the cursor keys to select “OK” and press ENTER.

X

■ Audio Receive

To restore the default setting, select “RESET”.

4

Off

Configures the Bluetooth settings when the unit is used as the Bluetooth audio receiver.

To exit from the menu, press ON SCREEN.

Bluetooth Standby

■ MusicCast Link Power Interlock

Selects whether to enable/disable the function that turns on the unit from Bluetooth devices

Selects whether turning on the power of the master device of the MusicCast network (the unit)

(Bluetooth standby). If this function is set to “On”, the unit automatically turns on when a

also turns on the power of other devices of the network.

connect operation is performed on the Bluetooth device.
Settings

Settings
Off

Disables the power interlock from the unit (MusicCast master).

On

Enables the power interlock from the unit (MusicCast master).

Off
On

Disables the Bluetooth standby function.
Enables the Bluetooth standby function.
(The unit consumes more power than when “Off” is selected.)

X
This setting is not available when “Network Standby” (p.132) is set to “Off”.

En

133

Multi Zone

■ Audio Send
Configures the Bluetooth settings when the unit is used as the Bluetooth audio transmitter.

Configures the multi zone settings.

Transmitter
Enables/disables the Bluetooth audio transmitter function.
When this function is enabled, you can enjoy audio played back on the unit using Bluetooth
speakers/headphones (p.81).
Settings
Off

Disables the Bluetooth audio transmitter function.

On

Enables the Bluetooth audio transmitter function.

■ Main Zone Set
Configures the main zone setting.

Zone Rename
Changes the zone name (for main zone) displayed on the front display or TV screen.
■ Setup procedure

1

Press ENTER to enter the name edit screen.

2

Use the cursor keys and ENTER to rename and select “ENTER” to confirm the entry.

X
To clear the entry, select “CLEAR”.

3

Use the cursor keys to select “OK” and press ENTER.

X
To restore the default setting, select “RESET”.

4
En

134

To exit from the menu, press ON SCREEN.

■ Zone2 Set

Audio Delay

Configures the Zone2 settings.

Adjusts the Zone2 audio output timing so that the audio is synchronized with the video.
Setting range
0 ms to 100 ms (1 ms increments)

Volume
Enables/disables volume adjustments for Zone2 output.

Mono

If you have connected an external amplifier with volume control to the unit, disable volume
adjustments for Zone2.

Switches between stereo and monaural for Zone2 output.

Settings

Settings

Fixed

Disables volume adjustments for Zone2 output.

Off

Produces stereo sounds in Zone2.

Variable

Enables volume adjustments for Zone2 output.

On

Produces monaural sounds in Zone2.

X

Enhancer

This setting is not available depending on the “Power Amp Assign” setting.

Enables/disables Compressed Music Enhancer (p.68) for Zone2 output.

Max Volume

Settings

Sets the Zone2 limit value of the volumes.

Off

Disables Compressed Music Enhancer.

Setting range
-30.0 dB to +15.0 dB (5.0 dB increments), +16.5 dB

On

Enables Compressed Music Enhancer.

X

Tone Control

This setting is available only when “Volume” is set to “Variable”.

Adjusts the level of high-frequency range (Treble) and low-frequency range (Bass) for Zone2
output.

Initial Volume

Settings

Sets the Zone2 initial volume for when the unit is turned on.
Settings
Off

Sets the level at the volume level of the unit when it last entered standby mode.

On

Sets at Mute or the specified volume level (-80 dB to +16.5 dB, 0.5 dB increments).
(This setting works only when the initial volume is set lower than “Max Volume”.)

X
This setting is available only when “Volume” is set to “Variable”.

En

135

Auto

Adjusts the levels of the high-frequency range (Treble) and low-frequency range
(Bass) automatically in synchronization with the main volume, with correction for
the auditory response of the human ear.

Manual

Adjusts the level of high-frequency range (Treble) and low-frequency range (Bass)
manually (-6.0 to +6.0 dB, 0.5 dB increments).

Bypass

Does not adjust the level of high-frequency range (Treble) and low-frequency
range (Bass).

■ HDMI OUT2 Assign

Extra Bass

Select the zone for which the HDMI OUT 2 (ZONE OUT) jack is used.

Enables/disables Extra Bass for Zone2 output. When Extra Bass is enabled, you can enjoy
enhanced bass sounds, regardless of the size of speakers.

Settings
Main, Zone2

Settings
Off

Disables Extra Bass.

On

Enables Extra Bass.

X
For details on audio signals that can be output to Zone2, see “Multi-zone output” (p.165).

Zone2 - Audio Output

Balance

Enables/disables the audio output from the HDMI OUT 2 jack when “HDMI OUT2 Assign” is set
Adjusts the front speaker balance for Zone2 output.

to “Zone2”.

Setting range
-20 to 0 to +20 (negative to the left and positive to the right)

On

Enables the audio output.

Off

Disables the audio output (video output only).

Zone Rename
Changes the zone name (for Zone2) displayed on the front display or TV screen.

■ Party Mode Set

You can change the zone name in the same manner as “Zone Rename” in “Main Zone Set”

Enables/disables switching to the party mode (p.99).

(p.134).
Choice
Target: Zone2
Settings

En

136

Disable

Disables switching to the party mode.

Enable

Enables switching to the party mode. You can turn on/off the party mode by
pressing PARTY on the remote control.

Function

■ Remote PROGRAM Key
Assigns the desired function to the PROGRAM keys of the remote control.

Configures the functions that make the unit easier to use.

For example, when “INPUT Selection” is selected, the PROGRAM keys will operate as the input
switching keys.
Settings
DSP Program
Selection

Select a sound program.

INPUT Selection

Select an input source for playback.

NET Selection

Select a network source.

Preset Selection

Select a registered item (shortcut).

■ Input Assignment

Browse Screen 1 Page Up/Down

Move to the previous/next page of the browse screen list.

Assigns the COMPONENT VIDEO, COAXIAL and OPTICAL jacks to another input source.

Subwoofer Trim

Adjust the subwoofer volume.

■ Procedure

Dialogue Level

Adjust the volume of dialogue sounds.

qRepeat / wShuffle

Select the repeat/shuffle setting for the USB storage device or media server.

Example: assigning the OPTICAL (2) jack to the input source “AV 2”

1

Use the cursor keys to select the cell at the intersection of “AV 2” and “Optical”, and press ENTER.

■ Display Set
Configures the settings related to the front display and TV screen display.

Dimmer (Front Display)
Adjusts the brightness of the front display.
Setting range
-4 to 0 (higher to brighten)

2

Y

Use the cursor keys to select “2” and press ENTER.

The front display may become dark when “ECO Mode” (p.140) is set to “On”.

Short Message
Selects whether to display short messages on the TV screen when the unit is operated (such as
input selection and volume adjustment).
Settings

3

To exit from the menu, press ON SCREEN.

X
You cannot assign both COAXIAL and OPTICAL jacks to the same input source.
En

137

On

Displays short messages on the TV screen.

Off

Does not display short messages on the TV screen.

Wallpaper

Manual
Switches the output level for electronic signal transmission manually when “Trigger Mode” is

Selects the image to be used as wallpaper on the TV.

set to “Manual”. This setting can also be used to confirm proper function of the external device
Settings

connected via the TRIGGER OUT jack.

Piano

Displays the piano image on the TV screen when there is no video signal.

Gray

Displays a gray background on the TV screen when there is no video signal.

Choices

■ Trigger Output1, Trigger Output2
Sets the TRIGGER OUT 1-2 jacks to function in sync with the power status of each zone or input

Low

Stops the electronic signal transmission.

High

Transmits the electronic signal.

Target Zone

switching.

Specifies the zone with which the TRIGGER OUT jack functions are synchronized.

Trigger Mode

Settings

Specifies the condition for the TRIGGER OUT jack to function.
Main

Settings
Power

Source

The TRIGGER OUT jack functions in sync with the power status of the zone
specified with “Target Zone”.
The TRIGGER OUT jack functions in sync with the input switching in the zone
specified with “Target Zone”.

Zone2

An electronic signal is transmitted according to the setting made in “Source.”
Manual

Select this to manually switch the output level for electronic signal transmission
with “Manual”.

All

Source
Specifies the output level of the electronic signal transmitted with each input, switching when
“Trigger Mode” is set to “Source”.
Choices
AV 1-7, VIDEO AUX, AUDIO 1-3, PHONO, TUNER, (network sources), Bluetooth, USB
Settings
Low

Stops the electronic signal transmission when you switch to the input source
specified in this option.

High

Transmits the electronic signal when you switch to the input source specified in
this option.

En

138

When “Trigger Mode” is set to “Power”, electronic signal transmission is
synchronized with the power status of the main zone.
When “Trigger Mode” is set to “Source”, electronic signal transmission is
synchronized with the input switching in the main zone.
When “Trigger Mode” is set to “Power”, electronic signal transmission is
synchronized with the power status of Zone2.
When “Trigger Mode” is set to “Source”, electronic signal transmission is
synchronized with the input switching in Zone2.
When “Trigger Mode” is set to “Power”, electronic signal transmission is
synchronized with the power status of the main zone or Zone2.
When “Trigger Mode” is set to “Source”, electronic signal transmission is
synchronized with the input switching in the main zone or Zone2.

ECO

■ Memory Guard
Prevents accidental changes to the settings.

Configures the power supply settings.
Settings
Off

Does not protect the settings.

On

Protects the settings until “Off” is selected.

X

When “Memory Guard” is set to “On”, the lock icon (o) is displayed on the menu screen.

Icon

■ Auto Power Standby
Sets the amount of time for the auto-standby function. If you do not operate the unit or if no
input signals are detected for the specified time, the unit will automatically go into standby
mode.
Settings
Off

Does not set the unit to standby mode automatically.

20 Minutes

Sets the unit to standby mode when you have not operated the unit and no input
signals are detected for 20 minutes.

2 Hours, 4 Hours,
8 Hours, 12 Hours

Sets the unit to standby mode when you have not operated the unit for the
specified time. For example, when “2 Hours” is selected, the unit will switch to
standby mode if you do not operate it for 2 hours.

Default
U.K., Europe and Russia models: 20 Minutes
Other models: Off

X

Just before the unit enters standby mode, “AutoPowerStdby” appears and then countdown starts in the front
display.

En

139

Viewing information about the unit
(Information menu)

■ ECO Mode
Enables/disables the eco (power saving) mode.
You can reduce the unit’s power consumption by setting “ECO Mode” to “On”. After setting, be
sure to press ENTER to restart the unit.

You can view information about the unit using the TV screen.

Settings

X

Off

If new firmware is available,

Disables the eco mode.

(mail icon) appears at the upper right of the “Information”. For details, see

“Updating the unit’s firmware via the network” (p.147).

On

Enables the eco mode.

Y
• When “ECO Mode” is set to “On”, the front panel display may become dark.
• If you want to play audio at high volume, set “ECO Mode” to “Off”.

1
2

Press ON SCREEN.

3

Use the cursor keys (e/r) to select an information type.

4

To exit from the menu, press ON SCREEN.

Use the cursor keys to select “Information” and press ENTER.

Language
Select an on-screen menu language.

Settings
English, Japanese, French, German, Spanish, Russian, Italian, Chinese

X
The information on the front display is provided in English only.

En

140

Types of information

■ HDMI Monitor
Displays information about the TVs connected to the HDMI OUT jacks.

You can check the following information in the Information menu.

Use the cursor keys (q/w) to switch between “OUT1” and “OUT2”.

■ Audio Signal

Interface

TV interface

Displays information about the current audio signal.

Video Resolution

Resolutions supported by the TV

Format

Channel
Input

Output

Audio format of the input signal

■ Network

The number of source channels in the input signal
(front/surround/LFE)

Displays the network information on the unit.

For example, “5.1 (3/2/0.1)” means 5.1ch in total (3 front channels,
2 surround channels, and LFE).

Sampling

The number of samples per second of the input digital signal

Dialogue

The dialogue normalization level of the input bitstream signal

Channel

The number of signal output channels (for example, “5.1.2”
denotes “standard 5.1-channel plus 2 for overhead speaker
channels”) and the speaker terminals from which signals are
output

(When using wired or wireless [Wi-Fi] network connection)

X

IP Address

IP address

Subnet Mask

Subnet mask

Default Gateway

The IP address of the default gateway

DNS Server (P)

The IP address of the primary DNS server

DNS Server (S)

The IP address of the secondary DNS server

MAC Address (Ethernet)
MAC address

• Even when the unit is set to output bitstream signals directly, the signal may be converted depending on the

MAC Address (Wi-Fi)

specifications and settings of the playback device.

Network Name

Network name (the unit’s name on the network) (p.133)

MusicCast Network

The status of the MusicCast network connection

■ Video Signal

Wired/Wireless

The status of the wired or wireless connection

Displays information about the current video signal.

SSID

• Some information may not be available depending on the signal type.

HDMI Signal

Presence or absence of HDMI signal input/output

HDMI Resolution

Resolutions of input signal (analog or HDMI) and output signal (HDMI)

Analog Resolution

Resolutions of input signal (analog)

En

141

(When using wireless [Wi-Fi] network connection)
The SSID of the wireless network

Configuring the system settings
(ADVANCED SETUP menu)

(When using Wireless Direct)
SSID

The SSID of the wireless network

Security

Security method

Security Key

Security key

IP Address

IP address

Subnet Mask

Subnet mask

MAC Address (Wi-Fi)

MAC address

MusicCast Network

The status of the MusicCast network connection

Network Connection

“Wireless Direct” indication

Configure the system settings of the unit while viewing the front display.

1
2

Set the unit to standby mode.
While holding down STRAIGHT on the front panel, press MAIN ZONE z.
MAIN ZONE z

STRAIGHT

■ System
Displays the system information on the unit.
Remote ID

The unit’s remote control ID setting (p.144)

TV Format

The unit’s video signal type (p.144)

Speaker Impedance

The speaker impedance setting of the unit (p.143)

Tuner Freq. Step

PROGRAM

3
4
5

(Asia and General models only)
The FM/AM tuning frequency setting of the unit (p.144)

System ID

System ID number

Firmware Version

The version of firmware installed on the unit

(mail icon) appears at the upper right of the

“Information” and “System” icons, and the corresponding message will be displayed in this screen. You can
update the unit’s firmware by pressing ENTER in this screen and following the procedure in “Updating the unit’s
firmware via the network” (p.147).

■ Multi Zone
Displays information about Zone2.
Input

The input source selected for Zone2

Volume

The volume for Zone2

Press STRAIGHT to select a setting.
Press MAIN ZONE z to set the unit to standby mode and turn it on again.

The new settings take effect.

X
If the unit detects a newer firmware over the network,

Press PROGRAM to select an item.

En

142

ADVANCED SETUP menu items

Changing the speaker impedance setting
(SPEAKER IMP.)

X
Default settings are underlined.

Item

Function

SPEAKER IMP.

Changes the speaker impedance setting.

143

REMOTE SENSOR

Turns on/off of the remote control sensor on the main unit.

143

REMOTE ID

Selects the unit’s remote control ID.

144

TUNER FRQ STEP

(Brazil, Asia and General models only)
Changes the FM/AM tuning frequency setting.

SPEAKER¡IMP.
8¬MIN

Page

Change the unit’s speaker impedance settings depending on the impedance of the speakers
connected.
Settings

144

TV FORMAT

Switches the video signal type.

144

MONITOR CHECK

Removes the limitation on HDMI video output.

144

4K MODE

Selects the HDMI 4K (60 Hz/50 Hz) signal format.

145

DTS MODE

Switches the DTS format notification setting.

145

RECOV./BACKUP

Creates backup of the settings of the unit, or recovers the settings from
the backup.

145

INITIALIZE

Restores the default settings.

146

FIRM. UPDATE

Updates the firmware.

146

VERSION

Checks the version of firmware currently installed on the unit.

146

6 Ω MIN

Select this option when you connect 6-ohm speakers to the unit. You can also use
4-ohm speakers as the front speakers.

8 Ω MIN

Select this option when you connect 8-ohm or higher speakers to the unit.

Turning on/off the remote control sensor
(REMOTE SENSOR)
REMOTE SENSOR
ON
Turn on/off the remote control sensor on the main unit. While the remote control sensor is
turned off, you cannot control the unit from the remote control.
Settings

En

143

ON

Turns on the remote control sensor.

OFF

Turns off the remote control sensor.

Selecting the remote control ID (REMOTE ID)
REMOTE ID

Switching the video signal type (TV FORMAT)
TV FORMAT
NTSC

ID1

Change the unit’s remote control ID so that it matches the remote control’s ID (default: ID1).

Switch the video signal type of the unit so that it matches to the format of your TV.

When using multiple Yamaha AV receivers, you can set each remote control with a unique
remote control ID for its corresponding receiver.

Settings
NTSC, PAL

Settings
ID1, ID2

Default
U.S.A., Canada, Korea, Brazil and General models: NTSC
Other models: PAL

■ Changing the remote control ID of the remote control

1

To select ID1, hold down the cursor key (e) and SCENE1 together for 3 seconds.

Removing the limitation on HDMI video output
(MONITOR CHECK)

To select ID2, hold down the cursor key (e) and SCENE2 together for 3 seconds.

Changing the FM/AM tuning frequency setting
(TUNER FRQ STEP)

MONITOR CHECK
YES
The unit automatically detects resolutions supported by a TV connected to the HDMI OUT jack.

(Brazil, Asia and General models only)

Disable the monitor check function if you want to specify a resolution in “Resolution” (p.129)

TUNER FRQ STEP
FM50/AM9

when the unit cannot detect the TV’s resolution or when you want to specify a different
resolution than the detected resolution.

Change the FM/AM tuning frequency setting of the unit depending on your country or region.

Settings

Settings
FM100/AM10
FM50/AM9

Select this when you want to adjust the FM frequency by 100-kHz steps and AM by
10-kHz steps.
Select this when you want to adjust the FM frequency by 50-kHz steps and AM by
9-kHz steps.

YES

Enables the monitor check function. (Outputs video signals with a resolution
supported by the TV only.)

SKIP

Disables the monitor check function. (Outputs video signals with a specified
resolution regardless of compatibility with the TV.)

Y
Reset to “YES” if the unit becomes inoperable because video from the unit cannot be displayed on the TV after
“MONITOR CHECK” has been set to “SKIP”.

En

144

Selecting the HDMI 4K signal format (4K MODE)

Switching the DTS format notification setting (DTS MODE)
DTS MODE
MODE 1

4K MODE
MODE 1
Selects the format of signals input/output at the unit when HDMI 4K compatible TV and

Switches the DTS format notification setting.

playback device are connected to the unit.

This setting informs the video device (such as BD/DVD player) about the DTS formats that the

Settings

unit supports.
Settings

Inputs/outputs 4K signals shown in the table below.
MODE 1

MODE 2

Depending on the connected device or HDMI cables, video may not be displayed
correctly. In this case, select “MODE 2”.

This mode conforms to the DTS:X standard.

MODE 1

Use this setting under normal circumstances.

Inputs/outputs 4K signals shown in the table below.

Use this setting if the video device (such as BD/DVD player) fails to properly
output a DTS signal even when it is playing back DTS-HD or DTS:X content.

MODE 2
Format
MODE 1
8 bit
RGB 4:4:4

,

YCbCr 4:4:4

,

4K/60, 50 Hz

4K/30, 25, 24 Hz

10 bit

MODE 2
12 bit

8 bit

10 bit

-

-

-

-

Backing up/recovering the settings (RECOV./BACKUP)

12 bit

RECOV./BACKUP
BACKUP

YCbCr 4:2:2

,

-

YCbCr 4:2:0

,

,

-

RGB 4:4:4

,

,

-

YCbCr 4:4:4

,

,

-

YCbCr 4:2:2

,

Creates backup of the settings of the unit, or recovers the settings from the backup.
■ Backup/recovery procedure

1

,

Press STRAIGHT repeatedly to select “BACKUP” or “RECOVERY” and press INFO to start the
process.

Y

Choices

• When “MODE 1” is selected, use a Premium High Speed HDMI Cable or Premium High Speed Cable with
Ethernet.
• Regardless of the setting, 4K signals are input as “MODE 2” for the VIDEO AUX (HDMI IN) jack.

BACKUP

Creates backup of the settings of the unit in the internal memory.

RECOVERY

Recovers the settings of the unit from the backup (available only when
backup has been created).

Note
• Do not turn off the unit during the recovery process. Otherwise, the settings may not be restored
correctly.
• The backup does not contain user information (such as user accounts and passwords).

En

145

Restoring the default settings (INITIALIZE)

Checking the firmware version (VERSION)

INITIALIZE
CANCEL

VERSION

x.xx

Restores the default settings for the unit.

Check the version of firmware currently installed on the unit.

Choices

X

VIDEO

Restores the default settings for video configurations.

ALL

Restores the default settings for the unit.

CANCEL

Does not perform an initialization.

• You can also check the firmware version in “System” (p.142) in the “Information” menu.
• It may take a while until the firmware version is displayed.

Updating the firmware (FIRM. UPDATE)
FIRM. UPDATE
USB
New firmware that provides additional features or product improvements will be released as
needed. Updates can be downloaded from the Yamaha website. If the unit is connected to the
Internet, you can download the firmware via the network. For details, refer to the information
supplied with updates.
■ Firmware update procedure
Do not perform this procedure unless firmware update is necessary. Also, make sure you read the
information supplied with updates before updating the firmware.

1

Press STRAIGHT repeatedly to select “USB” or “NETWORK” and press INFO to start firmware
update.
Choices
USB

Update the firmware using a USB memory device.

NETWORK

Update the firmware via the network.

X
If the unit detects newer firmware over the network, the corresponding message will be displayed after
ON SCREEN is pressed. In this case, you can also update the unit’s firmware by following the procedure in
“Updating the unit’s firmware via the network” (p.147).

En

146

Updating the unit’s firmware via the network
New firmware that provides additional features or product
1

2

3

4

6

7

V-AUX

3

PHONO

Internet, you can download the firmware via the network and update it.
5

AUDIO

1

2

Note
TUNER

MAIN

BLUETOOTH

ZONE 2

USB

NET

PARTY

HDMI OUT

• Do not operate the unit or disconnect the power cable or network cable
during firmware update. Firmware update takes about 20 minutes or more
(depending on your Internet connection speed).
• If the unit is connected to the wireless network, network update may not be
possible depending on the condition of the wireless connection. In this case,
update the firmware using the USB memory device (p.146).

SCENE

1

2

PROGRAM

3

MUTE

Updating the unit’s firmware immediately

improvements will be released as needed. If the unit is connected to the

AV

4

1
2

To start the firmware update, use the cursor keys to select
“START” and press ENTER.

3

If “UPDATE SUCCESS PLEASE POWER OFF!” appears on
the front display, press MAIN ZONE z on the front panel.

• For details on update, visit the Yamaha website.

VOLUME

Read the on-screen description.

The firmware update is complete.
TOP MENU

POP-UP/MENU

ON
SCREEN

OPTION

Cursor keys
ENTER

ENTER

RETURN

DISPLAY

X

X

• You can also update the firmware using the USB memory device from the “ADVANCED

If you want to cancel without doing anything now, select “CLOSE”.

SETUP” menu (p.146).
• The firmware update indicator (p.12) on the front display lights up when a firmware

be displayed in the “System” screen (p.142). You can update the unit’s firmware by
pressing ENTER in the “System” screen.

update is available via the network.

BAND

A firmware update is available if the following message is displayed after

MODE

TUNING

PRESET

SUR. DECODE STRAIGHT
MOVIE

MUSIC

INFO

SLEEP

1

2

3

5

6

7

8

9

0

MEMORY

ENT

(mail icon)

appears at the upper right of the “Information” and “System” icons, and a message will

Information icon

ON SCREEN is pressed.

ENHANCER PURE DIRECT

4

Message

System Icon
En

147

Updating the unit’s firmware at power off
z
AV

1

5

2

3

6

4

7

V-AUX

1

2

3

PHONO

TUNER

BLUETOOTH

USB

NET

PARTY

HDMI OUT

AUDIO

MAIN

ZONE 2

1
2

2

To set the firmware to update at power off, use the cursor
keys to select “LATER” and press ENTER.

3

Press z (receiver power) to turn off the unit.
The following message is displayed on the front display.

SCENE

1

Read the on-screen description.

3

4

Firmware update indicator (flashes)
PROGRAM

MUTE

TOP MENU

NETWORK
UPDATE:ENTER

VOLUME

POP-UP/MENU

ON
SCREEN

X

OPTION

The unit turns off automatically without performing the firmware update 2
ENTER

RETURN

DISPLAY
BAND

MODE

TUNING

PRESET

SUR. DECODE STRAIGHT
MOVIE

MUSIC

INFO

SLEEP

1

2

3

4

5

6

7

8

9

0

MEMORY

ENT

ENHANCER PURE DIRECT

Cursor keys
ENTER
RETURN

minutes after Step 3.

4

To start the firmware update, press ENTER.

X

• To cancel the firmware update and turn off the unit, press RETURN.
• You can also start the firmware update by pressing INFO on the front panel.
• The unit turns off without performing the firmware update if you turn off the
unit with AV CONTROLLER or MusicCast CONTROLLER.

If the firmware update is complete, the unit turns off automatically.

En

148

APPENDIX
Frequently asked questions
every time you add a new HDMI Control-compatible device to your system. For information on

The new speaker system does not provide an ideal sound
balance...

how HDMI Control works between your TV and playback devices, refer to the instruction
manuals for each device.

If you have changed speakers or have a new speaker system, use “Auto Setup” to optimize the

I want to turn off the on-screen messages displayed during
operations...

speaker settings again (p.43). If you want to adjust the speaker settings manually, use “Manual
Setup” in the “Setup” menu (p.123).

By default, short messages are displayed on the TV screen when the unit is operated (such as

Since we have small children, we want to set limitations on the
volume control...

input selection and volume adjustment). If the short messages bother you when you are
watching movies or sports, configure “Short Message” (p.137) in the “Setup” menu to turn off

If a small child accidentally operates the controls on the main unit or remote control, the

the short messages.

volume may suddenly increase. This may also cause injury or damage the unit or speakers. We

I want to prevent accidental changes to the settings...

recommend using “Max Volume” in the “Setup” menu to set the maximum volume level for the
unit in advance (p.127). You can also set the maximum volume for Zone2 (p.127).

You can protect the settings configured on the unit (such as speaker settings) by utilizing
“Memory Guard” in the “Setup” menu (p.139).

I am occasionally startled by a sudden loud sound when turning
on the unit...

The unit’s remote control is simultaneously controlling another
Yamaha product as well as the unit...

By default, the volume level when the unit last entered standby mode is automatically applied.
If you want to fix the volume, use “Initial Volume” in the “Setup” menu to set the volume to be

When using multiple Yamaha products, the remote control may work on another Yamaha

applied when the receiver is turned on (p.128). You can also set the initial volume for Zone2

product or another remote control may work on the unit. If this happens, register different

(p.128).

remote control IDs for the devices that you want to control with each remote control (p.144).

We are bothered by volume differences when switching
between input sources…

I want to enjoy videos/audio played back on the video device
even when the unit is in standby mode...

You can correct volume differences between input sources by utilizing “Input Trim” in the

If you have connected a video device to the unit with HDMI, you can output videos/audio

“Option” menu (p.109).

played back on the video device to the TV even when the unit is in standby mode. To use this
function, set “Standby Through” (p.131) in the “Setup” menu to “On” or “Auto”. You can also

I made HDMI connections but HDMI Control does not work at
all...

switch the input source using the remote control of the unit when this function is enabled.

To use HDMI Control, you need to perform the HDMI Control link setup (p.165). After
connecting HDMI Control-compatible devices (such as BD/DVD players) to the unit, enable
HDMI Control on each device and perform the HDMI Control link setup. This setup is required

En

149

Troubleshooting
Refer to the table below when the unit does not function properly.
If the problem you are experiencing is not listed below or if the instructions below do not help, turn off the unit, disconnect the power cable, and contact the nearest authorized Yamaha dealer or
service center.

First, check the following:

1
2
3

The power cables of the unit, TV and playback devices (such as BD/DVD players) are connected to AC wall outlets securely.
The unit, subwoofer, TV and playback devices (such as BD/DVD players) are turned on.
The connectors of each cable are securely inserted in to jacks on each device.

Power, system and remote control
Problem

Cause

Remedy

The power does not turn on.

The protection circuitry has been activated three times consecutively.
As a safety precaution, capability to turn on the power is disabled. Contact your nearest
When the unit is in this condition, the standby indicator on the unit blinks
Yamaha dealer or service center to request repair.
if you try to turn on the power.

The power does not turn off.

The internal microcomputer has frozen, due to an external electric shock Hold down MAIN ZONE z on the front panel for more than 10 seconds to initialize and
(such as lightning or excessive static electricity) or to a drop in the power reboot the unit. (If the problem persists, disconnect the power cable from the AC wall
supply voltage.
outlet and plug it again.)

The power turns off (standby mode) immediately.

The unit was turned on while a speaker cable was shorted.

Twist the bare wires of each speaker cable firmly and reconnect to the unit and speakers
(p.25).

The sleep timer worked.

Turn on the unit and start playback again.

The auto-standby function activated because the unit was not used for
the specified time.

To disable the auto-standby function, set “Auto Power Standby” in the “Setup” menu to
“Off” (p.139).

The speaker impedance setting is incorrect.

Set the speaker impedance to match your speakers (p.143).

The protection circuitry has been activated because of a short circuit.

Twist the bare wires of each speaker cable firmly and reconnect to the unit and speakers
(p.25).

The protection circuitry has been activated because the volume of the
unit is too high.

Turn down the volume. If “ECO Mode” in the “Setup” menu is set to “On”, set it to “Off”
(p.140).

The unit enters standby mode automatically.

The unit is not reacting.

The internal microcomputer is frozen, due to an external electric shock Hold down MAIN ZONE z on the front panel for more than 10 seconds to initialize and
(such as lightning or excessive static electricity) or to a drop in the power reboot the unit. (If the problem persists, disconnect the power cable from the AC wall
supply voltage.
outlet and plug it again.)

En

150

Problem

The unit cannot be controlled using the remote
control.

Cause

Remedy

The unit is out of the operating range.

Use the remote control within the operating range (p.6).

The batteries are weak.

Replace with new batteries.

The unit’s remote control sensor is exposed to direct sunlight or strong
lighting.

Adjust the lighting angle, or reposition the unit.

(China, Korea, U.K., Europe and Russia models only)
The remote control is set to control external devices.

Press RECEIVER to set the remote control to control the unit (the key lights up in orange).

The remote control IDs of the unit and the remote control are not
identical.

Change the remote control ID of the unit or the remote control (p.144).

The remote control sensor on the main unit is turned off.

Set “REMOTE SENSOR” in the “ADVANCED SETUP” menu to “ON” (p.143).

Audio
Problem

No sound.

Cause

Remedy

Another input source is selected.

Select an appropriate input source with the input selection keys.

Signals that the unit cannot reproduce are being input.

Some digital audio formats cannot be played back on the unit. To check the audio format
of the input signal, use “Audio Signal” in the “Information” menu (p.141).

The cable connecting the unit and playback device is defective.

If there is no problem with the connection, replace with another cable.

The maximum volume is set.

Use “Max Volume” in the “Setup” menu to adjust the maximum volume (p.127).

A device connected to the output jacks of the unit is not turned on.

Turn on all devices connected to the output jacks of the unit.

The volume cannot be increased.
The playback source does not contain a signal for the channel.

To check it, use “Audio Signal” in the “Information” menu (p.141).

The currently selected sound program/decoder does not use the
speaker.

To check it, use “Test Tone” in the “Setup” menu (p.126).

Audio output of the speaker is disabled.

Perform “Auto Setup” (p.43) or use “Configuration” in the “Setup” menu to change the
speaker settings (p.124).

The volume of the speaker is set too low.

Perform “Auto Setup” (p.43) or use “Level” in the “Setup” menu to adjust the speaker
volume (p.128).

The speaker cable connecting the unit and the speaker is defective.

If there is no problem with the connection, replace with another speaker cable.

The speaker is malfunctioning.

To check it, replace with another speaker. If the problem persists, the unit may be
malfunctioning.

The playback source does not contain LFE or low-frequency signals.

To check if the subwoofer is working properly, use “Test Tone” in the “Setup” menu
(p.126).

Subwoofer output is disabled.

Perform “Auto Setup” (p.43) or set “Subwoofer” in the “Setup” menu to “Use” (p.125).

The volume of the subwoofer is too low.

Adjust the volume on the subwoofer.

The subwoofer has been turned off by its auto-standby function.

Disable the auto-standby function of the subwoofer or adjust its sensitivity level.

No sound is coming from a specific speaker.

No sound is coming from the subwoofer.

En

151

Problem

Cause

Remedy

The TV does not support HDCP (High-bandwidth Digital Content
No sound from the playback device (connected to the Protection).
unit with HDMI).
The number of devices connected to the HDMI OUT jack exceeds the
limit.
No sound from the playback device (when HDMI
Control is used).

No sound from the TV (when HDMI Control is used).

The TV is set to output audio from the TV speakers.

Disconnect some of the HDMI devices.
Change the audio output setting on your TV so that the playback device audio is output
from the speakers connected to the unit.

TV audio is selected as the input source.

Select an appropriate input source with the input selection keys.

The TV is set to output audio from the TV speakers.

Change the audio output setting on your TV so that the TV audio is output from the
speakers connected to the unit.

A TV that does not support ARC is connected to the unit only with an
HDMI cable.

Use a digital optical cable to make an audio connection (p.32).

(If the TV is connected to the unit with an audio cable)
The TV audio input setting does not match the actual connection.
(If you are trying to use ARC)

Use “TV Audio Input” in the “Setup” menu to select the correct audio input jack (p.130).

Set “ARC” in the “Setup” menu to “On” (p.130). Also, enable ARC on the TV.

ARC is disabled on the unit or TV.
Only the front speakers work on multichannel audio.

Refer to the instruction manuals for the TV and check the TV’s specifications.

The playback device is set to output 2-channel audio (such as PCM) only.

To check it, use “Audio Signal” in the “Information” menu (p.141). If necessary, change
the digital audio output setting on the playback device.

The unit is too close to another digital or radio frequency device.

Move the unit further away from the device.

The cable connecting the unit and playback device is defective.

If there is no problem with the connection, replace with another cable.

The volume of the unit is too high.

Turn down the volume. If “ECO Mode” in the “Setup” menu is set to “On”, set it to “Off”
(p.140).

A device connected to the unit’s output jacks is not turned on.

Turn on all devices connected to the unit’s output jacks.

Noise/hum is heard.

The sound is distorted.

The sound is interrupted.

If the HDMI OUT 2 (ZONE OUT) jack is assigned to Zone2, HDMI audio
For details, see “Connecting an HDMI-compatible device to play back videos/audio”
output may be interrupted during some zone operations due to internal
(p.96).
circuitry switching.

En

152

Video
Problem

Cause

Remedy

Another input source is selected on the unit.

Select an appropriate input source with the input selection keys.

Another input source is selected on the TV.

Switch the TV input to display the video from the unit.

The video signal output from the unit is not supported by the TV.

Set “MONITOR CHECK” in the “ADVANCED SETUP” menu to “YES” (p.144).

No video.

No video from the playback device (connected to the
unit with HDMI).

The cable connecting the unit and TV (or playback device) is defective.

If there is no problem with the connection, replace with another cable.

The input video signal (resolution) is not supported by the unit.

To check the information about the current video signal (resolution), use “Video Signal”
in the “Information” menu (p.141). For information about video signals supported by the
unit, see “HDMI signal compatibility” (p.167).

The TV does not support HDCP (High-bandwidth Digital Content
Protection).
The playback device that supports HDCP 2.2 is connected to the VIDEO
AUX (HDMI IN) jack.

Refer to the instruction manuals for the TV and check the TV’s specifications.
If you want to play back contents that require HDCP 2.2-compatible devices, both the TV
and playback device must support HDCP 2.2.
To play back contents that require HDCP 2.2-compatible devices, connect the playback
device to the HDMI (AV 1–7) jack (p.34).

The number of devices connected to the HDMI OUT jack is over the limit. Disconnect some of the HDMI devices.
The menu of the unit is not displayed on the TV.

Another input source is selected on the TV.

Switch the TV input to display the video from the unit (HDMI OUT jack).

(If you are using 2 TVs in the main zone)

Select “HDMI OUT 1” or “HDMI OUT 2” to output the signals only to the TV you are using
(p.60).

Another TV is turned off when “HDMI OUT 1+2” is selected.
The video is interrupted.

(If the HDMI OUT 2 jack is assigned to Zone2)

For details, see “Connecting an HDMI-compatible device to play back videos/audio”
HDMI audio output may be interrupted during some zone operations due (p.96).
to internal circuitry switching.

En

153

FM/AM radio (AM radio feature is not available for the Australia, U.K., Europe and Russia models)
Problem

Cause

Remedy

There is multi-path interference.

Adjust the FM antenna height or orientation, or place it in a different location.

Your area is too far from the FM station transmitter.

Set “FM Mode” in the “Option” menu to “Mono” to select monaural FM radio reception
(p.110).

FM radio reception is weak or noisy.

Use an outdoor FM antenna. We recommend using a sensitive multi-element antenna.
AM radio reception is weak or noisy.

The noises may be caused by fluorescent lamps, motors, thermostats, or It is difficult to completely eliminate noise. It may be reduced by using an outdoor AM
other electrical equipment.
antenna.
Select the station manually (p.69).
Your area is too far from the FM station transmitter.
Use an outdoor antenna. We recommend using a sensitive multi-element antenna.
Adjust the AM antenna orientation.

Radio stations cannot be selected automatically.

Select the station manually (p.69).

The AM radio signal is weak.

Use an outdoor AM antenna. Connect it to the ANTENNA (AM) jack together with the
supplied AM antenna.
AM radio stations cannot be registered as presets.

Auto Preset is for registering FM radio stations only. Register AM radio stations manually
(p.70).

Auto Preset has been used.

DAB radio (Australia, U.K., Europe and Russia models only)
Problem
No DAB radio reception.

Cause

Remedy

An initial scan has not been performed.

Perform an initial scan to receive DAB radio (p.72).

Reception strength of DAB radio is poor.

Check reception strength in “Tune AID” in the “Option” menu (p.74), and adjust the
antenna height or orientation, or place it in a different location.

There is no DAB coverage in your area.

Check with your dealer or WorldDMB online at “http://www.worlddab.org” for a listing of
the DAB coverage in your area.

There is multi-path interference.

Check reception strength in “Tune AID” in the “Option” menu (p.74), and adjust the
antenna height or orientation, or place it in a different location.

Your area is too far from the DAB station transmitter.

Use an outdoor antenna. We recommend using a sensitive multi-element antenna.

No DAB radio reception even after performing an
initial scan.

DAB radio reception is weak or noisy.

DAB information is not available or is inaccurate.

The selected DAB radio station may be temporarily out of service or may
Contact the DAB broadcaster.
not provide information.

No DAB radio sound.

The selected DAB radio station may be temporarily out of service.

En

154

Try the station later or select another station.

Bluetooth
Problem

Cause

Remedy

The Bluetooth function of the unit is disabled.

A Bluetooth connection cannot be established.

No sound is produced, or the sound is interrupted
during playback.

Enable the Bluetooth function (p.133).

Another Bluetooth device is already connected to the unit.

Terminate the current Bluetooth connection and then establish a new connection (p.80).

The unit and the Bluetooth device are too far apart.

Move the Bluetooth device closer to the unit.

There is a device (such as microwave oven and wireless LAN) that
outputs signals in the 2.4 GHz frequency band nearby.

Move the unit away from those devices.

The Bluetooth device does not support A2DP.

Use a Bluetooth device that supports A2DP.

The connection information registered on the Bluetooth device is not
working for some reason.

Delete the connection information on the Bluetooth device, and then establish a
connection between the Bluetooth device and the unit again (p.80).

The volume of the Bluetooth device is set too low.

Turn up the volume of the Bluetooth device.

The Bluetooth device is not set to send audio signals to the unit.

Switch the audio output of the Bluetooth device to the unit.

The Bluetooth connection has been terminated.

Establish a Bluetooth connection between the Bluetooth device and the unit again
(p.80).

The unit and the Bluetooth device are too far apart.

Move the Bluetooth device closer to the unit.

There is a device (such as microwave oven and wireless LAN) that
outputs signals in the 2.4 GHz frequency band nearby.

Move the unit away from those devices.

En

155

USB and network
Problem

Cause

Remedy

The USB device is not connected to the USB jack securely.

Turn off the unit, reconnect your USB device, and turn the unit on again.

The unit does not detect the USB device.
The file system of the USB device is not FAT16 or FAT32.

Use a USB device with FAT16 or FAT32 format.

Folders and files in the USB device cannot be viewed.

The data in the USB device is protected by the encryption.

Use a USB device without an encryption function.

The files in the USB device cannot be played back
continuously.

Files not supported by the unit exist in the selected folder.

If the unit detects a series of unsupported files (such as images and hidden files) during
playback, playback stops automatically. Do not store the unsupported files in the
playback folder.

The network feature does not function.

The network parameters (IP address) have not been obtained properly.

Enable the DHCP server function on your router and set “DHCP” in the “Setup” menu to
“On” on the unit (p.131). If you want to configure the network parameters manually,
check that you are using an IP address which is not used by other network devices in your
network (p.131).

The wireless router (access point) is turned off.

Turn on the wireless router.

The unit cannot connect to the Internet via a wireless The unit and the wireless router (access point) are too far apart.
router (access point).
There is an obstacle between the unit and the wireless router (access
point).
Microwave ovens or other wireless devices in your neighborhood might
disturb the wireless communication.

Place the unit and the wireless router (access point) closer to each other.
Move the unit and the wireless router (access point) in a location where there are no
obstacles between them.
Turn off these devices.

Wireless network is not found.
Access to the network is restricted by the firewall settings of the wireless
Check the firewall setting of the wireless router (access point).
router (access point).
Configure the sharing setting and select the unit as a device to which music contents are
shared (p.85).

The media sharing setting is not correct.

Some security software installed on your PC is blocking the access of the
Check the settings of security software installed on your PC.
unit to your PC.
The unit does not detect the PC.
The unit and PC are not in the same network.

Check the network connections and your router settings, and then connect the unit and
the PC to the same network.

The MAC address filter is enabled on the unit.

In “MAC Address Filter” in the “Setup” menu, disable the MAC address filter or specify the
MAC address of your PC to allow it to access to the unit (p.132).

The files in the PC cannot be viewed or played back.

The files are not supported by the unit or the media server.

Use the file format supported by both the unit and the media server. For information
about the file formats supported by the unit, see “Playing back music stored on media
servers (PCs/NAS)” (p.85).

The files in the PC cannot be played back
continuously.

Files not supported by the unit exist in the selected folder.

If the unit detects a series of unsupported files (such as images and hidden files) during
playback, playback stops automatically. Do not store the unsupported files in the
playback folder.

En

156

Problem

The Internet radio cannot be played.

The iPod does not recognize the unit when using
AirPlay.

Cause

Remedy

The selected Internet radio station is currently not available.

There may be a network problem at the radio station, or the service may have been
stopped. Try the station later or select another station.

The selected Internet radio station is currently broadcasting silence.

Some Internet radio stations broadcast silence at certain of times of the day. Try the
station later or select another station.

Access to the network is restricted by the firewall settings of your
network devices (such as the router).

Check the firewall settings of your network devices. The Internet radio can be played
only when it passes through the port designated by each radio station. The port number
varies depending on the radio station.

The unit is connected to a multiple SSID router.

Access to the unit might be restricted by the network separation function on the router.
Connect the iPod to the SSID which can access the unit.

The unit and smartphone/tablet are not in the same network.

Check the network connections and your router settings, and then connect the unit and
smartphone/tablet to the same network.

The MAC address filter is enabled on the unit.

In “MAC Address Filter” in the “Setup” menu, disable the MAC address filter or specify the
MAC address of your smartphone/tablet to allow it to access to the unit (p.132).

The MusicCast compatible device is turned off.

Turn on the MusicCast compatible device.

The MusicCast compatible device is not connected to the MusicCast
network.

Connect the device with “MusicCast CONTROLLER”.

The application for smartphone/tablet “AV
CONTROLLER” does not detect the unit.

No sound from the MusicCast compatible device.

The MusicCast connection cannot be made on
“MusicCast CONTROLLER”.

“MusicCast CONTROLLER” does not detect a
MusicCast compatible device.

Connect the mobile device to the wireless router and start “MusicCast CONTROLLER”.

The mobile device which “MusicCast CONTROLLER” is installed is not
connected to the wireless network at your home.

Disable the cellular data transmission.

The MusicCast compatible device is turned off.

Turn on the MusicCast compatible device.

The mobile device which “MusicCast CONTROLLER” is installed is not
connected to the wireless network at your home.

Connect the mobile device to the wireless router and set the MusicCast compatible
device with “MusicCast CONTROLLER”.
Turn on the MusicCast compatible device.

The MusicCast compatible device is turned off.
Enable the network standby function on the MusicCast compatible device.
Firmware update via the network is failed.

It may not be possible depending on the condition of the network.

En

157

Update the firmware via the network again or use a USB memory device (p.146).

Error indications on the front display
Message
Access denied

Cause

Remedy

Access to the PC is denied.

Configure the sharing settings and select the unit as a device to which music contents are shared (p.85).

The unit cannot access the USB device.

Turn off the unit and reconnect your USB device. If the problem persists, try another USB device.
Make sure your router and modem are turned on.

Access error
There is a problem with the signal path from the network to the unit.

Check the connection between the unit and your router (or hub) (p.39).
Check SP Wires

The speaker cables short circuit.

Twist the bare wires of the cables firmly and connect to the unit and speakers properly.

Internal Error

An internal error has occurred.

Contact the nearest authorized Yamaha dealer or service center.

No content

There are no playable files in the selected folder.

Select a folder that contains files supported by the unit.

No device

The unit cannot detect the USB device.

Turn off the unit and reconnect your USB device. If the problem persists, try another USB device.

Please wait

The unit is preparing for connecting to the network.

Wait until the message disappears. If the message stays more than 3 minutes, turn off the unit and turn it on
again.

RemID Mismatch

The remote control IDs of the unit and the remote control are not
identical.

Change the remote control ID of the unit or the remote control (p.144).

Remote Off

The unit cannot be operated from remote control because the remote
control sensor on the main unit is turned off.

Use the controls on the front panel. To use the remote control, set “REMOTE SENSOR” in the “ADVANCED SETUP”
menu to “ON” (p.143).

The unit cannot play back the songs stored on the USB device for some
reasons.

Check the song data. If it cannot be played on another device, the song data may be defective.

The unit cannot play back the songs stored on the PC for some reason.

Check if the format of files you are trying to play is supported by the unit. For information about the formats
supported by the unit, see “Playing back music stored on media servers (PCs/NAS)” (p.85). If the unit supports
the file format, but still cannot play back any files, the network may be overloaded with heavy traffic.

Firmware update is failed.

Update the firmware again.

USB Overloaded

An overcurrent is flowing through the USB device.

Turn off the unit and reconnect your USB device. If the problem persists, try another USB device.

Version error

Firmware update is failed.

Update the firmware again.

Unable to play

Update failed.

En

158

Glossary
This section explains the technical terms used in this manual.

DSD (Direct Stream Digital)
DSD (Direct Stream Digital) technology stores audio signals on digital storage media, such as SACD (Super Audio
CDs). The signals are stored at a high-frequency sampling rate (such as 2.8224 MHz and 5.6448 MHz). The highest

Audio information (audio decoding format)

frequency response is equal to or higher than 100 kHz, with a dynamic range of 120 dB. This technology offers better

Dolby Atmos

DTS 96/24

Introduced first in the cinema, Dolby Atmos brings a revolutionary sense of dimension and immersion to the Home

DTS 96/24 is a compressed digital audio format that supports 5.1-channel and 96 kHz/24-bit audio. This format

Theater experience. Dolby Atmos is an adaptable and scalable object based format that reproduces audio as

remains fully compatible with the existing multichannel audio systems that support DTS Digital Surround. This

audio quality than that used for CDs.

independent sounds (or objects) that can be accurately positioned and move dynamically throughout the 3

technology is used for music DVDs, etc.

dimensional listening space during playback. A key ingredient of Dolby Atmos is the introduction of a height plane of

DTS Dialog Control

sound above the listener.

DTS Dialog Control allows you to boost the dialog. This can be useful in noisy environments to help make the dialog

Dolby Atmos Stream

more intelligible. People with impaired hearing may also benefit. Note that the content creator may disable the use

Dolby Atmos content will be delivered to your Dolby Atmos enabled AV receiver via Dolby Digital Plus or Dolby

of this feature in the mix, so that DTS Dialog Control may not always be available. Note that updates to your AVR may

TrueHD on Blu-ray Disc, downloadable files and streaming media. A Dolby Atmos stream contains special metadata

add more functionality to DTS Dialog Control or increase the range of the feature.

that describes the positioning of sounds within the room. This object audio data is decoded by a Dolby Atmos AV

DTS Digital Surround

receiver and scaled for optimum playback through Home Theater speaker systems of every size and configuration.

DTS Digital Surround is a compressed digital audio format developed by DTS, Inc. that supports 5.1-channel audio.

Dolby Digital

This technology is used for audio on most DVD discs.

Dolby Digital is a compressed digital audio format developed by Dolby Laboratories, Inc. that supports 5.1-channel

DTS-ES

audio. This technology is used for audio on most DVD discs.

DTS-ES creates total 6.1-channel audio from 5.1-channel sources that are recorded with DTS-ES. This decoder adds

Dolby Digital Plus

a surround back sound to the original 5.1-channel sound. In the DTS-ES Matrix 6.1 format, a surround back sound is

Dolby Digital Plus is a compressed digital audio format developed by Dolby Laboratories, Inc. that supports

recorded in the surround channels, and in the DTS-ES Discrete 6.1 format, a discrete surround back channel is

7.1-channel audio. Dolby Digital Plus remains fully compatible with the existing multichannel audio systems that

recorded.

support Dolby Digital. This technology is used for audio on BD (Blu-ray discs).

DTS Express

Dolby Enabled Speaker

DTS Express is a compressed digital audio format that supports 5.1-channel audio and allows a higher compression

A convenient alternative to speakers built into the ceiling, products utilizing Dolby speaker technology employ the

rate than the DTS Digital Surround format developed by DTS, Inc. This technology is developed for audio streaming

ceiling above you as a reflective surface for reproducing audio in the height plane above the listener. Dolby enabled

services on the Internet and secondary audio on BD (Blu-ray discs).

speakers feature a unique upward firing driver and special signal processing that can be built into a conventional

DTS-HD High Resolution Audio

speaker, or a standalone speaker module, minimally impacting the overall speaker system footprint while providing

DTS-HD High Resolution Audio is a compressed digital audio format developed by DTS, Inc. that supports

an immersive listening experience during Dolby Atmos and Dolby surround playback.

7.1-channel and 96 kHz/24-bit audio. DTS-HD High Resolution Audio remains fully compatible with the existing

Dolby Surround

multichannel audio systems that support DTS Digital Surround. This technology is used for audio on BD (Blu-ray

Dolby surround is a next generation surround technology that intelligently up mixes stereo; 5.1 and 7.1 content for

discs).

playback through your surround speaker system. Dolby surround is compatible with traditional speaker layouts, as

DTS-HD Master Audio

well as Dolby Atmos enabled playback systems that employ in-ceiling speakers or products with Dolby speaker

DTS-HD Master Audio is an advanced lossless audio format developed to offer a high-definition home theater

technology.

experience with the quality of the studio master by DTS, Inc. DTS-HD Master Audio can carry up to eight channels of

Dolby TrueHD

96 kHz/24-bit audio (up to six channels of 192 kHz/24-bit audio) simultaneously. This technology is used for audio on

Dolby TrueHD is an advanced lossless audio format developed by Dolby Laboratories, Inc. to offer a high-definition

BD (Blu-ray discs).

home theater experience with the quality of the studio master. Dolby TrueHD can carry up to eight channels of 96
kHz/24-bit audio (up to six channels of 192 kHz/24-bit audio) simultaneously. This technology is used for audio on BD
(Blu-ray discs).

En

159

DTS Neo:6

WMA (Windows Media Audio)

DTS Neo:6 enables 6-channel playback from 2-channel sources. There are two modes available: “Music mode” for

One of the compressed digital audio formats developed by Microsoft Corporation. With psychoacoustic

music sources and “Cinema mode” for movie sources. This technology provides discrete full-bandwidth matrix

technologies, this compression method achieves a high compression rate. Reportedly, it is capable of compressing

channels of surround sound.

data quantity by about 1/20 maintaining a certain level of audio quality.

DTS:X
DTS:X is the next generation object-based, multi-dimensional audio technology from DTS. Unbound from channels,
DTS:X conveys the fluid movement of sound to create an incredibly rich, realistic and immersive soundscape - in
front of, behind, beside and above the audience - more accurately than ever before. DTS:X offers the ability to
automatically adapt the audio to the speaker layout that best fits the space, from a television’s built-in speakers to
a home surround theater system to a dozen or more speakers in a commercial cinema. Immerse yourself at
www.dts.com/dtsx

FLAC
FLAC is a file format for lossless audio data compression. FLAC is inferior to lossy compressed audio formats in
compression rate but provides higher audio quality.

MP3
One of the compressed digital audio format used by MPEG. With psychoacoustic technologies, this compression
method achieves a high compression rate. Reportedly, it is capable of compressing data quantity by about 1/10
maintaining a certain level of audio quality.

MPEG-4 AAC
An MPEG-4 audio standard. It is used for mobile telephones, portable audio players, and audio streaming services on
Internet because it allows a high compression rate of data while maintaining better audio quality than MP3.

Neural:X
Neural:X is the latest downmixing/upmixing and spatial remapping technology from DTS. It is built in to DTS:X to
provide upmix of Neural:X-encoded and non-encoded (PCM) data. In DTS:X for AVRs and Sound Bars, Neural:X can
produce up to 11.x channels.

PCM (Pulse Code Modulation)
PCM is a signal format under which an analog audio signal is digitized, recorded, and transmitted. This technology is
the basis of all other audio format. This technology is used as a lossless audio format called Linear PCM for audio on
a variety of media, including CDs and BD (Blu-ray discs).

Sampling frequency/Quantization bit
Sampling frequency and quantization bits indicate the quantity of information when an analog audio signal is
digitized. These values are noted as in the following example: “48 kHz/24-bit”.
• Sampling frequency
Sampling frequency (the number of times the signal is sampled per second) is called the sampling rate. When the
sampling frequency is higher, the range of frequencies that can be played back are wider.
• Quantization bit
The number of quantization bits indicate the degree of accuracy when converting the sound level into a numeric
value. When the number of quantized bits is higher, the expression of the sound level is more accurate.

WAV
Windows standard audio file format, which defines the method of recording the digital data obtained by converting
audio signals. By default, the PCM method (no compression) is used, but you can also use other compression
methods.

En

160

Audio Information (Others)

HDMI and video information

Bi-amplification connection (Bi-amp)

Component video signal

A bi-amplification connection uses two amplifiers for a speaker. When you use the bi-amplification connection, the

With the component video signal system, the video signal is separated into the Y signal for luminance and the Pb and

unit drives the tweeter and woofer in a speaker with the discrete amplifiers. As a consequence, the tweeter and

Pr signals for chrominance. Color can be reproduced more faithfully with this system because each of these signals

woofer provide clear audio signal without the interference.

is independent.

LFE (Low Frequency Effects) 0.1 channel

Composite video signal

This channel reproduces low-frequency bass signals and has a frequency range from 20 Hz to 120 Hz. This channel is

With the composite video signal system, color, brightness, and synchronization data signals are combined and

added to the channels for all bands with Dolby Digital or DTS to enhance low frequency audio effects. This channel

transmitted with a single cable.

is labeled 0.1 because it is limited to only low frequency audio.

Deep Color

Lip sync

Deep Color is a technology that HDMI specification supports. Deep Color increases the number of available colors

Video output sometimes lags behind audio output due to the complexity of signal processing caused by an increase

within the boundaries defined by the RGB or YCbCr color space. Conventional color systems process the color using

in video signal capacity. Lip sync is a technique for automatically correcting the timing lag between audio and video

8 bits. Deep Color processes the color with 10, 12, or 16 bits. This technology allows HDTVs and other displays to

output.

increase from millions of colors to billions of colors and eliminate on-screen color banding for smooth tonal
transitions and subtle gradations between colors.

HDCP
HDCP (High-bandwidth Digital Content Protection) is a digital copy protection form that prevents copying of digital
contents as it travels across connections (such as HDMI).

HDMI
HDMI (High-Definition Multimedia Interface) is the world-wide standard interface for digital audio/video signal
transmission. This interface transmits both digital audio and digital video signals using a single cable without any
loss. HDMI complies with HDCP (High-bandwidth Digital Content Protection) and provides a secure audio/video
interface. For further information on HDMI, visit the HDMI website at “http://www.hdmi.org/”.

x.v.Color
“x.v.Color” is a technology that the HDMI specification supports. It is a more extensive color space than sRGB and
allows the expression of colors that were not hitherto possible. While remaining compatible with the color gamut of
sRGB standards, “x.v.Color” expands the color space, and thus can produce more vivid, natural images.

En

161

Network information

Yamaha technologies

SSID

CINEMA DSP (Digital Sound Field Processor)

SSID (Service Set Identifier) is a name that identifies a particular wireless LAN access point.

Since the surround sound systems were originally designed for use in movie theaters, their effect is best experienced

Wi-Fi

in a theater that has many speakers designed for acoustic effects. Since home conditions (such as room size, wall
material, and number of speakers) can differ so widely, it is inevitable that there are differences in the sound that you

Wi-Fi (Wireless Fidelity) is a technology that allows an electronic device to exchange data or connect to the Internet

hear. Based on a wealth of actually measured data, CINEMA DSP, Yamaha’s original DSP technology provides the

wirelessly using radio waves. Wi-Fi offers the advantage of eliminating the complexity of making connections with

audiovisual experience of a movie theater in your own home.

network cables by using wireless connection. Only products that complete Wi-Fi Alliance interoperability tests can
carry the “Wi-Fi Certified” trademark.

CINEMA DSP HD3

WPS

The actually measured sound field data contain the information of the height of the sound images. CINEMA DSP HD3
feature achieves the reproduction of the accurate height of the sound images so that it creates the accurate and

WPS (Wi-Fi Protected Setup) is a standard established by the Wi-Fi Alliance, which allows easy establishment of a

intensive stereoscopic sound fields in a listening room.

wireless home network.

Compressed Music Enhancer
The Compressed Music Enhancer feature compensates for missing harmonics in compression music formats (such
as MP3). As a result, this technology provides improved performance for the overall sound system.

SILENT CINEMA
Yamaha has developed a natural, realistic sound effect DSP algorithm for headphones. Parameters for headphones
have been set for each sound program, so that accurate representations of all the sound programs can be enjoyed
on headphones.

Virtual CINEMA DSP
Virtual CINEMA DSP allows the system to virtually reproduce the sound field of the surround speakers with front left
and right speakers. Even if the surround speakers are not connected, the unit creates the realistic sound field in a
listening room.

Virtual CINEMA FRONT
Virtual CINEMA FRONT allows the system to virtually reproduce the sound field of the surround speakers with front
surround speakers. Even if the surround speakers placed in the front, the unit creates the realistic sound field in a
listening room.

Virtual Presence Speaker (VPS)
Virtual Presence Speaker allows the system to virtually reproduce the height of the 3D sound field without presence
speakers. Even if the presence speakers are not connected, the unit creates the 3D sound field in your room.

Virtual Surround Back Speaker (VSBS)
Virtual Surround Back Speaker allows the system to virtually reproduce the sound field of the surround back
speakers. Even if the surround back speakers are not connected, the unit adds a sense of depth to the rear sound filed
of CINEMA DSP.

En

162

Supported devices and file formats

File formats
For information about specifications of each file, refer to the instruction manual of your

This section explains the devices and file formats supported by the unit.

recording device or consult file's help.

Supported devices

■ USB/PC (NAS)

For information about specifications of each device, refer to the instruction manual of it.

File

■ Bluetooth device
• The unit supports Bluetooth devices that support A2DP or AVRCP.

WAV *

• A Bluetooth device may not be detected by the unit or some feature may not be compatible,
depending on the model.

■ USB devices
• The unit supports USB mass storage class devices (e.g., flash memories or portable audio
players) using FAT16 or FAT32 format.

• USB devices with encryption cannot be used.

32/44.1/48/88.2/96/
176.4/192

Quantization
bitrate (bit)

Bitrate

The number
of channels

Gapless
playback

16/24

-

2

,

MP3

32/44.1/48

-

8 to 320

2

-

WMA

32/44.1/48

-

8 to 320

2

-

MPEG-4 AAC

32/44.1/48

-

8 to 320

2

-

FLAC

32/44.1/48/88.2/96/
176.4/192

16/24

-

2

,

ALAC

32/44.1/48/88.2/96

16/24

-

2

,

AIFF

32/44.1/48/88.2/96/
176.4/192

16/24

-

2

,

DSD

2.8 MHz/5.6 MHz

1

-

2

-

• Do not connect devices other than USB mass storage class devices (such as USB chargers or
USB hubs), PCs, card readers, an external HDD, etc.

Sampling frequency
(kHz)

• Some features may not be compatible, depending on the model or manufacturer of the USB
* Linear PCM format only

storage device.

Y
• To play back FLAC files stored on a PC or NAS, you need to install server software that supports sharing of FLAC

■ AirPlay

files via DLNA on your PC or use a NAS that supports FLAC files.

AirPlay works with iPhone, iPad, and iPod touch with iOS 4.3.3 or later, Mac with OS X Mountain

• Digital Rights Management (DRM) contents cannot be played back.

Lion or later, and PC with iTunes 10.2.2 or later.
Made for.
iPhone 7 Plus, iPhone 7, iPhone SE, iPhone 6s Plus, iPhone 6s, iPhone 6 Plus, iPhone 6, iPhone
5s, iPhone 5c, iPhone 5, iPhone 4s
iPad Pro (9.7″ and 12.9″), iPad mini 4, iPad Air 2, iPad mini 3, iPad Air, iPad mini 2, iPad mini,
iPad (3rd and 4th generation), iPad 2
iPod touch (5th and 6th generation)
(as of March 2017)

En

163

Video signal flow

Video conversion table

Video signals input from a video device to the unit are output

X

to a TV as shown below.

• You can select the resolution and the aspect ratio applied to HDMI-output video processing in “Video Mode” (p.129) in the “Setup” menu.
• The unit does not convert 480-line and 576-line video signals interchangeably.

Video device

The unit

HDMI out

TV
Resolution

480i/576i

480p/576p

720p

1080i

1080p

4K

m

m

m

m

m

m

m

m

m

m

m

720p

m

m

m

m

1080i

m

m

m

m

1080p/50, 60 Hz

m

m

m

m

m

m

480i/576i
480p/576p

HDMI in

HDMI out

HDMI

HDMI

HDMI

HDMI

HDMI in

1080p/24 Hz

m

4K
COMPONENT
VIDEO in
COMPONENT
VIDEO

m

m

m

m

m

m

m

m

m

m

720p

m

m

m

m

1080i

m

m

m

m

m

m

m

m

480i/576i

m

COMPONENT
VIDEO

PR

PR

PB

PB

Y

Y

480p/576p
COMPONENT VIDEO in

VIDEO in
VIDEO

VIDEO

VIDEO in

480i/576i

m: Available

En

164

m

m

Information on HDMI

Multi-zone output
Audio signals that can be output to Zone2 vary depending on how you connect the device in

This section explains the functions related to HDMI and its signal compatibility.

Zone 2 to the unit's output jacks.
Using the unit’s
internal amplifier
(p.30)

HDMI Control
Using an external amplifier (p.95)

HDMI Control allows you to operate external devices via HDMI. If you connect a TV that

EXTRA SP jacks

ZONE OUT jacks

HDMI OUT 2
(ZONE OUT) jack (*1)

Digital audio (HDMI)

m (*2)

m (*2)

m (*3)

Digital audio
(COAXIAL/OPTICAL)

m(*4)

m (*4)

Analog audio (AUDIO)

m

m

USB (*5)

m

m

Operations available from the TV’s remote control

Network sources (*5)

m

m

• Standby synchronization

TUNER

m

m

• Volume control including mute

In \ Zone2 Out

supports HDMI Control to the unit with an HDMI cable, you can control the unit (such as power
and volume) with TV remote control operations. You can also control playback devices (such
as HDMI Control-compatible BD/DVD players) connected to the unit with an HDMI cable.
For details on connections, see “Connecting a TV and playback devices” (p.32) and
“Connecting video devices (such as BD/DVD players)” (p.34).

• Switching to input audio from the TV when the TV input is switched to its built-in tuner

m: Available

• Switching to input video/audio from the selected playback device

*1 Available when “HDMI OUT2 Assign” (p.136) in the “Setup” menu is set to “Zone2” (Audio

• Switching between audio output devices (the unit or TV speaker)

Output: On)

(Example)

*2 Available when 2-channel PCM signals are input (stereo output [down mixed to 2-channels]
when the input source selected in the main zone is selected)
Available when “HDMI OUT2 Assign” (p.136) in the “Setup” menu is set to “Zone2”

HDMI Control

HDMI Control

*3 Available when 2-channel PCM signals are input (stereo output [down mixed to 2-channels]
when the input source selected in the main zone is selected)
*4 Available when 2-channel PCM signals are input

Playback device
also turns off

*5 To play back DSD audio in Zone2, select “Main Zone Sync” as the Zone2 input with the web

The unit turns off
(standby)
Turn off the TV

control (p.101) or use the party mode (p.99).

Operations available from the unit’s remote control
• Starting playback on the playback device and turning on the TV with a scene selection (p.61)
• Switching the TV input to display the on-screen menu (when ON SCREEN is pressed)
• Controlling the playback device (playback and menu operations) using the external device
operation keys

En

165

(Example)

4

Use the cursor keys (e/r) to select “HDMI”.

For details on settings and operating your TV, refer to the instruction manual for the TV.

5

Use the cursor keys (q/w) to select “HDMI Control” and press ENTER.

Y

6

Use the cursor keys to select “On”.

7

Press ON SCREEN.

HDMI Control

HDMI Control

Playback starts

Turns on and displays
video from the playback
device
Press SCENE 1

To use HDMI Control, you need to perform the following HDMI Control link setup after
connecting the TV and playback devices.

This setup is required every time you add a new HDMI Control-compatible device to your system.

1
2

Turn on the unit, TV, and playback devices.

3

Control-compatible BD/DVD players).

Configure the settings of the unit.

1

Switch the TV input to display video from the unit.

2

Press ON SCREEN.
ON
SCREEN

RETURN

3

4

Turn off the main power of the TV and then turn off the unit and playback
devices.

5
6
7

OPTION

ON SCREEN
Cursor keys
ENTER

ENTER

Enable HDMI Control on the TV and playback devices (such as HDMI

DISPLAY

Use the cursor keys to select “Setup” and press ENTER.

Turn on the unit and playback devices and then turn on the TV.
Switch the TV input to display the video from the unit.
Check the followings.
On the unit: The input to which the playback device is connected is selected. If not, select
the input source manually.
On the TV: The video from the playback device is displayed.

8

Check that the unit is properly synchronized with the TV by turning off the TV
or adjusting the TV volume with the TV remote control.

En

166

Y

HDMI signal compatibility

• If HDMI Control does not work properly, try unplugging the TV in Step 3 and plugging in the TV again in Step 4.
It may solve the problem. Also, HDMI Control may not work if the number of connected devices exceeds the

• When CPPM copy-protected DVD-Audio is played back, video/audio signals may not be

limit. In this case, disable HDMI Control on the devices not in use.

output, depending on the type of the DVD player.

• If the unit is not synchronized to the TV’s power operations, check the priority of the audio output setting on

• The unit is not compatible with HDCP-incompatible HDMI or DVI devices. For details, refer to

the TV.

the instruction manual for each device.

• We recommend using TV and playback devices from the same manufacturer so that HDMI Control works more

• To decode audio bitstream signals on the unit, set the input source device appropriately so

effectively.

that the device outputs the bitstream audio signals directly (does not decode the bitstream

• We do not assure the operation of all HDMI Control-compatible devices.

signals on the playback device). For details, refer to the instruction manual for the playback
device.

Audio Return Channel (ARC)
ARC allows you to input TV audio to the unit with the HDMI cable which transmits video signal
to the TV.
Check the following after the HDMI Control settings.

1
2

Select a TV program with the TV remote control.
Check that the input source of the unit will be automatically switched to
“AUDIO 1” and the TV audio will be played back on the unit.
If you cannot hear the TV audio, check the following:
• “ARC” (p.130) in the “Setup” menu is set to “On”.
• The HDMI cable is connected to the ARC-compatible HDMI jack (HDMI jack marked
“ARC”) on the TV.
Some HDMI jack on the TV is not compatible with ARC. For details, refer to the instruction
manual for the TV.

Y
• If the audio is interrupted while using ARC, set “ARC” (p.130) in the “Setup” menu to “Off” and use an
audio cable (digital optical or stereo pin cable) to input TV audio to the unit (p.33).
• When using ARC, connect a TV with an HDMI cable that supports ARC.

X
“AUDIO 1” is set as TV audio input at the factory. If you have connected any external device to the AUDIO
1 jacks, use “TV Audio Input” (p.130) in the “Setup” menu to change the TV audio input assignment. To use
the SCENE function (p.62), you also need to change the input assignment for SCENE 2.

En

167

Trademarks
Bluetooth protocol stack (Blue SDK)
Copyright 1999-2014 OpenSynergy GmbH
Manufactured under license from Dolby Laboratories. Dolby, Dolby Atmos,
Dolby Surround, and the double-D symbol are trademarks of Dolby
Laboratories.

All rights reserved. All unpublished rights reserved.
The Wi-Fi CERTIFIED™ Logo is a certification mark of Wi-Fi Alliance®.
The Wi-Fi Protected Setup™ Identifier Mark is a certification mark of Wi-Fi
Alliance®.
(Australia, U.K., Europe and Russia models)
The unit supports DAB/DAB+ tuning.

For DTS patents, see http://patents.dts.com. Manufactured under license
from DTS, Inc. DTS, the Symbol, DTS in combination with the Symbol,
DTS:X, and the DTS:X logo are registered trademarks or trademarks of DTS,
Inc. in the United States and/or other countries. © DTS, Inc. All Rights
Reserved.

MusicCast is a trademark or registered trademark of Yamaha Corporation.

The terms HDMI, the HDMI Logo, and High-Definition Multimedia Interface
are trademarks or registered trademarks of HDMI Licensing LLC in the
United States and other countries.

x.v.Color™
“x.v.Color” is a trademark of Sony Corporation.

Yamaha Eco-Label is a mark that certifies products of high environmental
performance.

Supports iOS 7 or later for setup using Wireless Accessory Configuration.
“Made for iPod,” “Made for iPhone,” and “Made for iPad” mean that an
electronic accessory has been designed to connect specifically to iPod,
iPhone, or iPad, respectively, and has been certified by the developer to
meet Apple performance standards.
Apple is not responsible for the operation of this device or its compliance
with safety and regulatory standards.
Please note that the use of this accessory with iPod, iPhone, or iPad may
affect wireless performance.

iTunes, AirPlay, iPad, iPhone, iPod, and iPod touch are trademarks of Apple
Inc., registered in the U.S. and other countries.
iPad Air and iPad mini are trademarks of Apple Inc.

“SILENT CINEMA” is a trademark of Yamaha Corporation.
DLNA™ and DLNA CERTIFIED™ are trademarks or registered trademarks of
Digital Living Network Alliance. All rights reserved. Unauthorized use is
strictly prohibited.

Google Noto Fonts (Version 1.001)

Windows™

Licensed under the Apache License, Version 2.0 (the “License”);
you may not use this file except in compliance with the License.

Windows is a registered trademark of Microsoft Corporation in the United
States and other countries.

You may obtain a copy of the License at
http://www.apache.org/licenses/LICENSE-2.0

Internet Explorer, Windows Media Audio and Windows Media Player are
either registered trademarks or trademarks of Microsoft Corporation in the
United States and/or other countries.

App Store is a service mark of Apple Inc.

Copyright © 2012 Google Inc. All rights reserved.

Unless required by applicable law or agreed to in writing, software
distributed under the License is distributed on an “AS IS” BASIS, WITHOUT
WARRANTIES OR CONDITIONS OF ANY KIND, either express or implied.
See the License for the specific language governing permissions and
limitations under the License.

Android™ Google Play™
Android and Google Play are trademarks of Google Inc.

The Bluetooth® word mark and logos are registered trademarks owned by
Bluetooth SIG, Inc. and any use of such marks by Yamaha Corporation is
under license.

Blu-ray is a trademark of the Blu-ray Disc Association.

Explanations regarding GPL
This product utilizes GPL/LGPL open-source software in some
sections. You have the right to obtain, duplicate, modify, and
redistribute this open-source code only. For information on
GPL/LGPL open source software, how to obtain it, and the
GPL/LGPL license, refer to the Yamaha Corporation website
(http://download.yamaha.com/sourcecodes/musiccast/).

En

168

Specifications
Input jacks
• Analog Audio
Audio x 9 (AV 1-4, AUDIO 1-3, PHONO, VIDEO AUX)
• Digital Audio

• Supported Audio Formats

• TRIGGER OUT x 2
• RS-232C x 1

– Dolby Atmos

HDMI

– DTS:X
– Dolby TrueHD

• HDMI Features

Optical x 3 (AV 3, AUDIO 1–2)
(Supported sampling frequencies: 32 kHz to 96 kHz)

– 4K UltraHD Video (include 4K/60,50Hz 10/12bit)

Coaxial x 3 (AV 1-2, AUDIO 3)
(Supported sampling frequencies: 32 kHz to 192 kHz)

– ARC (Audio Return Channel)

• Video
Composite x 4 (AV 1-4)
Component x 2 (AV 1-2)
• HDMI Input
HDMI x 8 (AV 1-7, VIDEO AUX)
• Others
USB x 1 (USB2.0)
NETWORK x 1 (100Base-TX/10Base-T)

Output jacks
• Analog Audio

– 3D Video

– HDMI Control (CEC)

– Dolby Digital Plus
– Dolby Digital
– DTS-HD Master Audio
– DTS-HD High Resolution
– DTS Express

– Auto Lip Sync

– DTS

– 21:9 Aspect Ratio

– DSD 2.8 MHz 2-ch to 6-ch

– Deep Color

– PCM 2-ch to 8-ch (Max. 192 kHz/24 bit)

– x.v.Color

• Content Protection: HDCP compatible

– BT.2020 Colorimetry

(HDMI [AV 1–7]: HDCP 2.2 compatible)

– HDR (High Dynamic Range)
– HD audio playback

TUNER

– Selectable HDMI input in HDMI standby mode

• Analog Tuner

– HDMI Zone Output

[Australia model]

• Video Format (Repeater Mode)

DAB/FM x 1 (TUNER)

– VGA

[U.K., Europe and Russia models]

– 480i/60 Hz

DAB/FM with Radio Data System x 1 (TUNER)

*1 Note: Assignment is possible
[F.PRESENCE, ZONE2, BI-AMP]

– 576i/50 Hz

[Other models]

– 480p/60 Hz

FM/AM x 1 (TUNER)

*2 Note: Assignment is possible
[SURROUND BACK, ZONE2]

– 576p/50 Hz

– Speaker Out x 9 (7 ch) (FRONT L/R, CENTER, SURROUND L/R,
SURROUND BACK L/R, EXTRA SP 1 L/R *1, EXTRA SP 2 L/R *2)

– Pre Out x 7
(FRONT L/R, CENTER, SURROUND L/R, SURROUND BACK L/R)
– Subwoofer Out x 2 (SUBWOOFER 1-2, mono)
– ZONE OUT x 1 (ZONE 2)

USB

– 720p/60 Hz, 50 Hz

• Capable of Mass Storage Class USB Memory

– 1080i/60 Hz, 50 Hz
– 1080p/60 Hz, 50 Hz, 30 Hz, 25 Hz, 24 Hz
– 4K/60 Hz, 50Hz, 30 Hz, 25 Hz, 24 Hz

– Headphone x 1
• HDMI Output
HDMI OUT x 2 (HDMI OUT 1-2*)
* barter to ZONE OUT (ZONE2)

Other jacks
• YPAO MIC x 1
• REMOTE IN x 1
• REMOTE OUT x 1
En

169

• Current Supply Capacity: 1 A

Bluetooth

Compatible Decoding Formats

• Sink Function

• Decoding Format

Source Device to AVR (ex. Smartphone/Tablet)
• Source Function
AVR to Sink Device (ex. Bluetooth Headphone)

(1 kHz, 0.9% THD, 8 Ω)
Front L/R............................................................................ 135 W/ch
Center ............................................................................... 135 W/ch

– Dolby Atmos
– Dolby TrueHD, Dolby Digital Plus

Surround L/R ..................................................................... 135 W/ch
Surround Back L/R ............................................................ 135 W/ch

– Dolby Digital

(1 kHz, 0.9% THD, 4 Ω)

• Source Device to AVR (ex. Smartphone/Tablet)

– DTS:X

• Capable of Play/Stop Operation from Sink Device
• Bluetooth Version........................................................... Ver. 2.1+EDR

– DTS-HD Master Audio, DTS-HD High Resolution Audio,
DTS Express

• Supported Profile

– DTS 96/24, DTS-ES Matrix 6.1, DTS-ES Discrete 6.1

Front L/R [U.K., Europe and Russia models].................... 170 W/ch
• Maximum Effective Output Power (1-channel driven)
(1 kHz, 10% THD, 6 Ω)

Sink Function .................................................................A2DP, AVRCP

– DTS Digital Surround

Front L/R............................................................................ 170 W/ch

Source Function .............................................................A2DP, AVRCP

• Post Decoding Format

Center ................................................................................ 170 W/ch

• Supported Codec
Sink Function ....................................................................... SBC, AAC
Source Function ............................................................................SBC
• Wireless Output ...................................................... Bluetooth Class 2

Surround L/R ..................................................................... 170 W/ch

– Dolby Surround

Surround Back L/R ............................................................ 170 W/ch

– Neural:X
– DTS Neo:6 Music, DTS Neo:6 Cinema

Front L/R............................................................................ 165 W/ch

• Radio Frequency (Operational Frequency)... 2402 MHz to 2480 MHz

Audio Section

• Maximum Output Power (E.I.R.P) .......................... 4.0 dBm (2.5 mW)

• Rated Output Power (2-channel driven)

• Maximum Communication Distance ................................10 m (33 ft)

MusicCast
• Controlled by MusicCast Application (iOS, Android)
• MusicCast Link Client ..................................................... Main, Zone2
• MusicCast Link Master (Input Source) .................................................
NET/USB/Bluetooth, Analog External Input, Digital External Input,
Zone2

Center ................................................................................ 165 W/ch

(20 Hz to 20 kHz, 0.06% THD, 6 Ω)
Front L/R ..................................................................... 120 W+120 W
Center...................................................................................... 120 W
Surround L/R............................................................... 120 W+120 W
Surround Back L/R...................................................... 120 W+120 W
(20 Hz to 20 kHz, 0.06% THD, 8 Ω)
Front L/R ..................................................................... 110 W+110 W

• Network Connectivity ....................................Extend Mode, Connect

Center...................................................................................... 110 W

Network

Surround L/R............................................................... 110 W+110 W

• PC Client Function
• Compatible with DLNA ver. 1.5
• AirPlay supported

Surround Back L/R...................................................... 110 W+110 W
(1 kHz, 0.9% THD, 8 Ω)

Center...................................................................................... 120 W

• Wi-Fi function

Surround L/R............................................................... 120 W+120 W

– Capable of sharing with iOS devices by wireless connection and
USB connection

Surround L/R ..................................................................... 165 W/ch
Surround Back L/R ............................................................ 165 W/ch
• Dynamic Power (IHF)
Front L/R (8/6/4/2 Ω) ............................................135/165/210/280 W
• Damping Factor
Front L/R, 1 kHz, 8 Ω.........................................................150 or more
• Input Sensitivity / Input Impedance
PHONO (1 kHz, 100 W/8 Ω).............................................3.5 mV/47 kΩ
AUDIO 2 etc. (1 kHz, 100 W/8 Ω)....................................200 mV/47 kΩ
• Maximum Input Signal
PHONO (1 kHz, 0.5% THD) .......................................... 45 mV or more
AUDIO 2 etc. (1 kHz, 0.5% THD) .....................................2.4 V or more

Front L/R ..................................................................... 120 W+120 W

• Internet Radio
– Capable of WPS by PIN Method and Push-Button-Method

(1 kHz, 10% THD, 8 Ω)

Surround Back L/R...................................................... 120 W+120 W
• Rated Output Power (1-channel driven)
(1 kHz, 0.9% THD, 6 Ω)

• Rated Output Level / Output Impedance
PRE OUT
SUBWOOFER (50 Hz) ...................................................... 1.0 V/470 Ω
Except SUBWOOFER (1 kHz) .......................................... 1.0 V/470 Ω
ZONE OUT.......................................................................... 1.0 V/470 Ω
• Maximum Output Level

– Capable of Direct Connection with Mobile Device

Front L/R ............................................................................140 W/ch

– Available Security Method: WEP, WPA2-PSK (AES), Mixed Mode

Center.................................................................................140 W/ch

– Radio Frequency Band: 2.4 GHz

Surround L/R......................................................................140 W/ch

– Wireless LAN Standards: IEEE 802.11 b/g/n

Surround Back L/R.............................................................140 W/ch

– Radio Frequency (Operational Frequency): 2412 MHz to 2472 MHz
– Maximum Output Power (E.I.R.P): 17.5 dBm (56.2 mW)
En

170

PRE OUT/ZONE OUT ......................................................2.0 V or more
• Headphone Impedance ................................................. 16 Ω or more
• Frequency Response
AUDIO 2 etc. (10 Hz to 100 kHz) .............................................+0/-3 dB

• RIAA Equalization Deviation
PHONO (20 Hz to 20 kHz) ...................................................... 0±0.5 dB
• Total Harmonic Distortion

General

• Video Signal Level
Composite .........................................................................1 Vp-p/75 Ω
Component

[U.S.A. and Canada models] .......................................AC 120 V, 60 Hz

PHONO to PreOut (1 kHz, 1 V) ........................................0.04% or less

Y ......................................................................................1 Vp-p/75 Ω

AUDIO 2 etc. to Speaker Out (20 Hz to 20 kHz, 55 W/ 8 Ω)
.........................................................................................0.04% or less

Pb/Pr ...........................................................................0.7 Vp-p/75 Ω

• Signal to Noise Ratio (IHF-A Network)
(Pure Direct, Input 1 kΩ Shorted, Speaker Out)
PHONO .......................................................................... 95 dB or more
AUDIO 2 etc ................................................................. 110 dB or more
• Residual Noise (IHF-A Network)
Speaker Out ...................................................................150 μV or less
• Channel Separation
(Input 1 kΩ Shorted, 1 kHz/10 kHz)
PHONO ............................................................... 75 dB/60 dB or more
AUDIO 2 etc ........................................................ 75 dB/60 dB or more
• Volume Control
Main Zone .............................MUTE, -80 dB to +16.5 dB (0.5 dB Step)
Zone2 ....................................MUTE, -80 dB to +16.5 dB (0.5 dB Step)
• Tone Control Characteristics
Main Zone

• Video Maximum Input Level .................................... 1.5 Vp-p or more

[U.K., Europe and Russia models] ..............................AC 230 V, 50 Hz

[U.S.A. and Canada models]...........................87.5 MHz to 107.9 MHz
[Brazil, Asia and General models]
.................................................. 87.5/87.50 MHz to 108.0/108.00 MHz
[U.K., Europe and Russia models]..............87.50 MHz to 108.00 MHz
[Other models] ............................................87.50 MHz to 108.00 MHz
• 50 dB Quiet Sensitivity (IHF, 1 kHz, 100% MOD.)
Mono............................................................................. 3 μV (20.8 dBf)
• Signal to Noise Ratio (IHF)
Mono/Stereo ....................................................................69 dB/68 dB
• Harmonic Distortion (IHF, 1 kHz)
Mono/Stereo ...................................................................... 0.5%/0.6%
• Antenna Input ..........................................................75 Ω unbalanced

• Tuning Range

Bass Boost/Cut .................................... ±6.0 dB/50 Hz (0.5 dB Step)
Bass Turnover........................................................................ 350 Hz
Treble Boost/Cut ............................... ±6.0 dB/20 kHz (0.5 dB Step)
Treble Turnover.................................................................... 3.5 kHz
• Filter Characteristics

[Korea model]..............................................................AC 220 V, 60 Hz
[Australia model].........................................................AC 240 V, 50 Hz

Treble Boost/Cut ............................... ±6.0 dB/20 kHz (0.5 dB Step)

Zone2

[China model] ..............................................................AC 220 V, 50 Hz

• Tuning Range

Bass Turnover........................................................................ 350 Hz

Treble Turnover.................................................................... 3.5 kHz

[Brazil and General models] ....AC 110 to 120/220 to 240 V, 50/60 Hz

FM Section

AM section (except Australia, U.K., Europe
and Russia models)

Bass Boost/Cut .................................... ±6.0 dB/50 Hz (0.5 dB Step)

• Power Supply

[U.S.A. and Canada models]...............................530 kHz to 1710 kHz
[Brazil, Asia and General models] ..... 530/531 kHz to 1710/1611 kHz
[Other models] ....................................................531 kHz to 1611 kHz

DAB section (Australia, U.K., Europe and
Russia models only)
• Tuning Range ......................................174 MHz to 240 MHz (Band III)

(fc=40/60/80/90/100/110/120/160/200 Hz)

• Support Audio Format............... MPEG 1 Layer II/MPEG-4 HE-AAC v2

H.P.F. (Front, Center, Surround, Surround Back: Small)
............................................................................................. 12 dB/oct.

• Antenna ....................................................................75 Ω unbalanced

[Asia model]................................................ AC 220 to 240 V, 50/60 Hz
• Power Consumption
[U.S.A. and Canada models] ......................................................450 W
[Other models] ...........................................................................420 W
• Standby Power Consumption
HDMI Control Off, Standby Through Off, Network Standby Off
......................................................................................................0.1 W
HDMI Control On, Standby Through On (No Signals),
Network Standby Off...................................................................1.5 W
HDMI Control Off, Standby Through Off, Network Standby On,
Bluetooth Standby Off
Wired.........................................................................................1.8 W
Wireless (Wi-Fi).........................................................................1.8 W
Wireless Direct..........................................................................1.9 W
HDMI Control Off, Standby Through Off,
Network Standby On (Wired), Bluetooth Standby On...............1.7 W
HDMI Control On, Standby Through On, Network Standby On
(Wireless Direct), Bluetooth Standby On ...................................2.7 W
• Maximum Power Consumption
[Brazil, Asia and General models]............................................1190 W
• Dimensions (W x H x D)
................................. 435 x 182 x 439 mm (17-1/8” x 7-1/8” x 17-1/4”)
* Including legs and protrusions
• Reference Dimensions (W x H x D) (with wireless antenna upright)
................................. 435 x 247 x 439 mm (17-1/8” x 9-3/4” x 17-1/4”)
• Weight ....................................................................... 14.9 kg (32.8 lbs)

L.P.F. (Subwoofer) .............................................................. 24 dB/oct.
* The contents of this manual apply to the latest specifications as of the
publishing date. To obtain the latest manual, access the Yamaha
website then download the manual file.

Video Section
• Video Signal Type .................................................. NTSC/PAL/SECAM

En

171

Yamaha Global Site
https://www.yamaha.com/
Yamaha Downloads
http://download.yamaha.com/

Manual Development Group
© 2017 Yamaha Corporation
Published 04/2017 AM-A0

YJ290A0/EN1



Source Exif Data:
File Type                       : PDF
File Type Extension             : pdf
MIME Type                       : application/pdf
PDF Version                     : 1.7
Linearized                      : Yes
Encryption                      : Standard V4.4 (128-bit)
User Access                     : Print, Extract, Print high-res
Create Date                     : 2017:03:14 20:49:57+09:00
Modify Date                     : 2017:04:27 16:14:48+09:00
Has XFA                         : No
XMP Toolkit                     : Adobe XMP Core 5.4-c005 78.147326, 2012/08/23-13:03:03
Metadata Date                   : 2017:04:27 16:14:48+09:00
Format                          : application/pdf
Document ID                     : uuid:b67ecfde-afb6-42c9-98aa-ae0ce19adec7
Instance ID                     : uuid:f5112aef-d462-424d-ab08-ab07413c0c56
Page Layout                     : SinglePage
Page Mode                       : UseOutlines
Page Count                      : 172
EXIF Metadata provided by EXIF.tools

Navigation menu